Home

TOBY-L2 series - U-Blox

1. FIRST SIM CARD TOBY L2 series 3v8 D VPP C6 i mM e o e VCC C1 nalog l Switch e e 10 C7 EIU e e CLK C3 VSIM KZ vsim 2VSIM e RST C2 SIM 10 EA dat e IDAT GND C5 i Cl c2 c3 cal cs pil pol pa pal i 1CLK SIM CLK Efl ck Ue ELK j i SE SECOND b 1RST SIM RST EN ST oper SIM CARD ep VPP C6 m zm e o Ld VCC C1 e e IO C7 Application CLK C3 Processor hd RST C2 GPIO x GND C5 R1 cel c7 csf col cid pj pd o7 pa J2 FIRST SIM CARD MPCI L2 series 3V8 VPP C6 ps cs e e e vcc C1 nalog SE Switch E e e 10 C7 See e e CLK C3 SE UIM_PWR MENS vsim VM n gt RETI UIM_DATA ET oat CC IDAT X A A GND C5 ca c2 c3 cal cl pi p3l p3 pal UIM_CLK EEK cx 7 JEE J i ee OS a LL E SECOND is RST UIM RESET KE RST oper SIM CARD ep a VPP C6 an s e vcc C1 u e e IO C7 Application CLK C3 Processor hd RST C2 GPIO GND C5 R1 ce c7 ca col cid ps og p7 r i D Figure 52 Application circuit for the connection to two removable SIM cards with SIM detection not implemented Reference C1 C4 C6 C9 C5 C10 C11
2. 12V e TOBY L2 series 8 VCC vcc 3 INH out H mete e e e o vcc 4 pi vcc Zo R1 SE C3 6 U1 5 FSW FB e ucl g C4 c2 2 SYNC come H4 R5 GND L3 R2 7 C5 _ GND 12V e MPCI L2 series 8 VCC 3 3Vaux 31 INH our H Teen s e e o 3 3Vaux L1 e D1 R3 3 3Vaux Re 3 3Vaux 8 EE 3 3Vaux c1 c6 FSW FB A RA CA Seege 2 SYNC comp H R5 GND L R7 T c5 GND Figure 33 Example of low cost VCC and 3 3Vaux supply application circuit using step down regulator Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer C1 22 yF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 1210 1096 25 V GRM32ER61E226KE15 Murata C2 100 pF Capacitor Tantalum B SIZE 20 6 3V 15mQ T520B107MOO6ATEO015 Kemet C3 5 6 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 1096 50 V GRM155R71H562KA88 Murata CA 6 8 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10 50 V GRM155R71H682KA88 Murata C5 56 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 596 50 V GRM1555C1H560JA01 Murata C6 220 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0603 1096 25 V GRM188R71E224KA88 Murata D1 Schottky Diode 25V 2 A STPS2L25 STMicroelectronics L1 5 2 UH Inductor 3096 5 28A 22 mQ 51038 522NL Coilcraft R1 4 7 kO Resistor 0402 196 0 063 W RCO402FR 074K7L Yageo R2 910 Q Resistor 04
3. Figure 49 Application circuits for the connection to a single removable SIM card with SIM detection not implemented Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer C1 C2 C3 CA 47 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 596 50 V GRM1555C1H470JAO01 Murata C5 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 1096 16 V GRM155R71C104KA01 Murata D1 D2 D3 D4 Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection PESD0402 140 Tyco Electronics J1 SIM Card Holder 6 p without card presence switch Various manufacturers as C707 10M006 136 2 Amphenol Table 30 Example of components for the connection to a single removable SIM card with SIM detection not implemented UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 100 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Guidelines for single SIM chip connection A solderable SIM chip M2M UICC Form Factor must be connected the SIM card interface of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules as described in Figure 50 Follow these guidelines to connect the module to a solderable SIM chip without SIM presence detection Connect the UICC SIM contacts C1 VCC and C6 VPP to the VSIM UIM_PWR pin of the module Connect the UICC SIM contact C7 I O to the SIM_IO UIM_DATA pin of the module Connect the UICC SIM contact C3 CLK to the SIM_CLK UIM_CLK pin of the module Connect the UICC SIM contact C2 RST to the SIM RST UIM RESET pin of the module Connect the UICC SI
4. cccceeeeeeseeeteeeees 131 2153 EE EE 131 2 16 Schematic for TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series module integration ccccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeees 133 2 16 1 Schematic for TOBY L2 module 00 product version 133 2 16 2 Schematic for TOBY L2 module 01 or 60 product versions sssssssee 134 2 16 3 Schematic for TOBY L2 module 02 product versions sssssssssseeeees 135 2164 Schematic Tor MPCIPE2 seres iste r iu eratis eet 136 2 17 Design in Checker 137 ZAZA Ee lege TE 137 2 17 2 Ee TEE 138 2 173 Antenna checklist o inttr tereti esie t dedii E fenis Eege Ee 138 3 Handling and soldering nint nnne nma meae an Lor Pa Rd tu oan 3 tu exte rand rtu aene 139 3 1 Packaging shipping storage and moisture preconditioning ssssssssssee 139 SP MEE a 0101 a 9 eee eee nee 139 LXI EET 140 3 3 1 Soldering Pas etae aeaee EE 140 3 3 2 Reflow soldering sssssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeneeeereneneereennr rene en rrr enr een eene tnn nnns 140 br MEElowsae elpe EM 141 prr EC rane e 141 3 3 5 Repeated retlow soldering iio itr totes etre meni E basan Und tuse deut ned 142 336 Wave Solderin E 142 3 3 7 Hand soldeng R 142 3 3 8 el 142 3 3 9 Conformal COAtNG BE 142 EC MES EE 142 3311 Grounding metal COVERS iis cuite tmt CO E prn ns E edente de dd 142 3 3 12 Use of ltras
5. 3 3Vaux 3 3Vaux 330uF 100nF 10nF 68pF 15pF 8 2pF Application Processor Open PERST Drain Output USB 2 0 Host D USB_D D USB_D NI Primary GND B GND ee tee ANTI e Antenna Open W_DISABLE NI7 Secondary Drain _ Antenna Output ANT2 3 SIM Card Connector EE Xam UIM_PWR UIM_DATA UIM_CLK UIM_RESET ESD ESD ESD ESD 100nF 47pF 47pF 47pF 47pF E vc WWAN Ke Indicator X EZB o wwaws Figure 78 Example of schematic diagram to integrate a MPCI L2 series module in an application board using all the interfaces UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 136 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 17 Design in checklist This section provides a design in checklist 2 17 1 Schematic checklist The following are the most important points for a simple schematic check v v N NNN RANNANARARARA A H WANN DC supply must provide a nominal voltage at VCC 3 3Vaux pin within the operating range limits DC supply must be capable of supporting both the highest peak and the highest averaged current consumption values in connected mode as specified in the TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 or in the MPCI L2 series Data Sheet 2 VCC 3 3Vaux voltage supply should be clean with very low ripple noise provide the suggested bypass cap
6. Figure 62 Application circuit for connecting TOBY L2 modules to u blox 1 8 V GNSS receivers Reference R1 R2 R3 U1 C1 Description 4 7 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W 47 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W Voltage Regulator for GNSS receiver and capacitor Part Number Manufacturer RC0402JR 074K7L Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR 0747KL Yageo Phycomp See GNSS receiver Hardware Integration Manual Table 38 Components for connecting TOBY L2 modules to u blox 1 8 V GNSS receivers UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 113 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Figure 63 illustrates an alternative application circuit solution in which the TOBY L2 supplies a u blox 1 8 V GNSS receiver The V INT 1 8 V regulated supply output of a TOBY L2 module can be used as supply source for a u blox 1 8 V GNSS receiver u blox 6 generation receiver or newer instead of using an external voltage regulator as shown in Figure 62 The V INT supply is able to support the maximum current consumption of these positioning receivers The internal switching step down regulator that generates the V INT supply is set to 1 8 V typical when the cellular module is switched on and it is disabled when the module is switched off The supply of the u blox 1 8 V GNSS receiver can be switched off using an external p channel MOS controlled by the GPIO2 pin of TOBY L2 cellular modules by means of a proper invertin
7. Choke inductors with a Self Resonance Frequency SRF in the range of 1 GHz are needed in series at the ANT DET pin L1 L2 and in series at the diagnostic resistor L3 L4 to avoid a reduction of the RF performance of the system improving the RF isolation of the load resistor Additional components R1 C1 and D1 in Figure 48 are needed at the ANT DET pin as ESD protection The ANT1 ANT2 pins must be connected to the antenna connector by means of a transmission line with nominal characteristics impedance as close as possible to 50 Q UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 97 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual The DC impedance at RF port for some antennas may be a DC open e g linear monopole or a DC short to reference GND e g PIFA antenna For those antennas without the diagnostic circuit of Figure 48 the measured DC resistance is always at the limits of the measurement range respectively open or short and there is no means to distinguish between a defect on antenna path with similar characteristics respectively removal of linear antenna or RF cable shorted to GND for PIFA antenna Furthermore any other DC signal injected to the RF connection from ANT connector to radiating element will alter the measurement and produce invalid results for antenna detection L It is recommended to use an antenna with a built in diagnostic resistor in the range from 5 kQ to 30 k
8. Figure 9 illustrates a typical example of the module current consumption profile when power saving is enabled The module is registered with network automatically enters the low power idle mode and periodically wakes up to active mode to monitor the paging channel for the paging block reception Detailed current consumption values can be found in TOBY L2 Data Sheet 1 and in MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 Current mA 100 Time s IDLE MODE ACTIVE MODE Current mA 2G case 0 44 2 09 s 50 ms 3G case 0 61 5 09 s LTE case 0 27 2 51 s 100 Active Mode RX Idle Mode Time ms Enabled Enabled Enabled lt gt 50 ms IDLE MODE ACTIVE MODE IDLE MODE Figure 9 VCC or 3 3Vaux current consumption profile with power saving enabled and module registered with the network the module is in idle mode and periodically wakes up to active mode to monitor the paging channel for paging block reception UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 27 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 5 1 6 VCC or 3 3Vaux current consumption in fixed active mode power saving disabled When power saving is disabled the module does not automatically enter the low power idle mode whenever possible the module remains in active mode Power saving configuration is by default disabled It can also be disabled using the AT UPSV command see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 for detail usag
9. It is recommended to provide direct access to the PWR_ON pin on the application board by means of an accessible test point directly connected to the PWR_ON pin 2 3 1 2 Guidelines for PWR_ON layout design The power on circuit PWR_ON requires careful layout since it is the sensitive input available to switch on the TOBY L2 modules It is required to ensure that the voltage level is well defined during operation and no transient noise is coupled on this line otherwise the module might detect a spurious power on request UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 86 of 162 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual biox 2 3 2 Module reset RESET_N or PERST 2 3 2 1 Guidelines for RESET_N and PERST circuit design The TOBY L2 series RESET_N is equipped with an internal pull up to the VCC supply and the MPCI L2 series PERST is equipped with an internal pull up to the 3 3 V rail as described in Figure 42 An external pull up resistor is not required and should not be provided If connecting the RESET_N or PERST input to a push button the pin will be externally accessible on the application device According to EMC ESD requirements of the application an additional ESD protection device e g the EPCOS CAO5P4S14THSG varistor should be provided close to accessible point on the line connected to this pin as described in Figure 42 and Table 24 L ESD sensitivity rating of the RESET_N and PERST pin
10. L The functionality of the SDIO Secure Digital Input Output interface pins is not supported by TOBY L2 modules 00 01 and 60 product versions the pins should not be driven by any external device TOBY L2 series modules include a 4 bit Secure Digital Input Output interface SDIO DO SDIO D1 SDIO D2 SDIO D3 SDIO CLK SDIO CMD designed to communicate with an external u blox short range Wi Fi module Combining a u blox cellular module with a u blox short range communication module gives designers full access to the Wi Fi module directly via the cellular module so that a second interface connected to the Wi Fi module is not necessary AT commands via the AT interfaces of the cellular module UART USB allows full control of the Wi Fi module from any host processor because Wi Fi control messages are relayed to the Wi Fi module via the dedicated SDIO interface for more details see the Wi Fi AT commands in the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 and see the Wi Fi Cellular Integration Application Note 15 Figure 65 and Table 41 show an application circuit for connecting TOBY L2 series cellular modules except 00 01 and 60 product versions to u blox ELLA W131 short range Wi Fi 802 11 b g n modules The SDIO pins of the cellular module are connected to the related SDIO pins of the u blox ELLA W1 series short range Wi Fi module with appropriate low value series damping resistors to avoid reflections and other losses in signal integrity
11. certification schemes that can be divided into three distinct categories Regulatory certification o Country specific approval required by local government in most regions and countries such as CE Conformit Europ enne marking for European Union FCC Federal Communications Commission approval for United States Industry certification o Telecom industry specific approval verifying the interoperability between devices and networks GCF Global Certification Forum partnership between European device manufacturers and network operators to ensure and verify global interoperability between devices and networks PTCRB PCS Type Certification Review Board created by United States network operators to ensure and verify interoperability between devices and North America networks Operator certification o Operator specific approval required by some mobile network operator such as AT amp T network operator in United States Even if TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules are approved under all major certification schemes the application device that integrates TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules must be approved under all the certification schemes required by the specific application device to be deployed in the market The required certification scheme approvals and relative testing specifications differ depending on the country or the region where the device that integrates TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules must be deployed on the rel
12. A digital side tone mixer integrated in the external audio codec provides loopback of the microphones ADC signal to the DAC headphone output The modules Va interface l S master is connected to the related pins of the external audio codec I S slave The GPIOG of the TOBY L2 series module that provides a suitable digital output clock is connected to the clock input of the external audio codec to provide clock reference The external audio codec is controlled by the TOBY L2 series module using the DDC I C interface which can concurrently communicate with u blox GNSS receivers and control an external audio codec The V INT output supplies the external audio codec defining proper digital interfaces voltage level Additional components are provided for EMC and ESD immunity conformity a 10 nF bypass capacitor and a series chip ferrite bead noise EMI suppression filter provided on each microphone line input and speaker line output of the external codec as described in Figure 66 and Table 42 The necessity of these or other additional parts for EMC improvement may depend on the specific application board design Specific AT commands are available to configure the Maxim MAX9860 audio codec for more details see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 UVGC UEXTDCONF AT commands As various external audio codecs other than the one described in Figure 66 Table 42 can be used to provide voice capability the appropriate specific application ci
13. Figure 76 is an example of a schematic diagram where a TOBY L2 cellular module 01 or 60 product version is integrated into an application board using all the available interfaces and functions of the module TOBY L201 01S TOBY L210 60S 3V8 vec vec e L vec 330pF 100nF tonF ee Ter bes GND EE Ecer RTC cv back up 100pF Application Processor JP Open PWR ON drain output TP Open RESET N drain output USB 2 0 host VBUS i EB vos o D i USB D D USB_D E cn TXD RXD RTS CTS DTR DSR RI DCD GND HJ HOST SELECTO ER HOST SELECT1 RSVD RSVD Primary ANT ER cellular antenna Secondary cellular antenna ANT2 Eu ANT DET VNT TP SDA SCL SIM Card Connector VSIM tra D l CCVCC C1 CCVPP C6 SIM IO CCIO C7 SIM CLK CCCLK C3 SIM RST CCRST C2 GND C5 DS RXD DS TXD DS CLK DS WA SDIO DO SDIO D1 SDIO D2 SDIO D3 SDIO CLK SDIO CMD H WWAN a indicator GPIO1 GPIO2 GPIO3 GPIOA GPIO5 GPIO6 GND Figure 76 Example of schematic diagram to integrate a TOBY L201 01S or TOBY L210 60S in an application using all interfaces UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 134 of 162 biox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 16 3 Schematic for TOB
14. 24 5 mm Laird Tech CMD69273 30NM GSM WCDMA LTE ceiling mount MIMO antenna with cables amp N type M 698 960 MHz 1710 2700 MHz 43 5 x 218 7 mm Pulse Electronics WA700 2700SMA GSM WCDMA LTE clip mount MIMO antenna with cables and SMA M 698 960 MHz 1710 2700 MHz 149 x 127 x 5 1 mm Table 28 Examples of external antennas UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 96 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 4 2 Antenna detection interface ANT DET L Antenna detection ANT_DET is not available on MPCI L2 series modules L Antenna detection ANT DET is not supported by TOBY L2 00 01 and 60 product versions 2 4 3 1 Guidelines for ANT DET circuit design Figure 48 and Table 29 describe the recommended schematic components for the antennas detection circuit that must be provided on the application board and for the diagnostic circuit that must be provided on the antennas assembly to achieve primary and secondary antenna detection functionality TOBY L2 series Radiating Zp 50 ohm Zo 50 ohm Zo 50 ohm Element ANT2 Kill J2 Antenna Cable C5 il Radiating L4 Diagnostic Zo 50 ohm Zo 50 ohm Element ET Circuit ANT El d j Antenna Cable c4 zl L3 Diagnostic Circuit Secondary Antenna Assembly ANT DET m Ta a Applicati
15. ANSI In addition to standard ESD safety practices the following measures should be taken into account whenever handling the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules Unless there is a galvanic coupling between the local GND i e the work table and the PCB GND then the first point of contact when handling the PCB must always be between the local GND and PCB GND Before mounting an antenna patch connect ground of the device When handling the module do not come into contact with any charged capacitors and be careful when contacting materials that can develop charges e g patch antenna coax cable soldering iron To prevent electrostatic discharge through the RF pin do not touch any exposed antenna area If there is any risk that such exposed antenna area is touched in non ESD protected work area implement proper ESD protection measures in the design When soldering the module and patch antennas to the RF pin make sure to use an ESD safe soldering iron For more robust designs employ additional ESD protection measures on the application device integrating the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules as described in section 2 15 3 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Handling and soldering Page 139 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 3 3 Soldering 3 3 1 Soldering paste No Clean soldering paste is strongly recommended for TOBY L2 series modules as it does not require cleaning after
16. According to EMC ESD requirements of the application an additional ESD protection should be provided close to the accessible point as described in Figure 41 and Table 23 L ESD sensitivity rating of the PWR_ON pin is 1 kV Human Body Model according to JESD22 A114 Higher protection level can be required if the line is externally accessible on the application board e g if an accessible push button is directly connected to PWR_ON pin and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection e g EPCOS CAO5PAS14THSG varistor close to the accessible point An open drain or open collector output is suitable to drive the PWR_ON input from an application processor as PWR ON input is equipped with an internal active pull up resistor to the VCC supply as described in Figure 41 A compatible push pull output of an application processor can also be used In any case take care to set the proper level in all the possible scenarios to avoid an inappropriate module switch on TOBY L2 series Application TOBY L2 series Processor VCC vcc Open Power on GO kO Drain 50 kQ push button Output aliis o o e e PWR ON PWR ON X ESD Figure 41 PWR ON application circuits using a push button and an open drain output of an application processor Reference Description Remarks ESD CT0402S14AHSG EPCOS Varistor array for ESD protection Table 23 Example ESD protection component for the PWR_ON application circuit L
17. B Glossary 3GPP 8 PSK 16QAM 64QAM ACM ADC AP ASIC AT BAW CSFB DC DCE DDC DL DRX DSP DTE ECM EDGE EMC EMI ESD ESR E UTRA FDD FEM FOAT FOTA FTP FW GND GNSS GPIO GPRS GPS HBM HSIC HSDPA HSUPA HTTP HW VO PC PS IP LDO LGA UBX 13004618 R12 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 3rd Generation Partnership Project 8 Phase Shift Keying modulation 16 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 64 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Abstract Control Model Analog to Digital Converter Application Processor Application Specific Integrated Circuit AT Command Interpreter Software Subsystem or attention Bulk Acoustic Wave ircuit Switched Fall Back irect Current ata Communication Equipment own Link Reception C D D Display Data Channel interface D Discontinuous Reception D igital Signal Processing Data Terminal Equipment Ethernet networking Control Model Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution Electro Magnetic Compatibility Electro Magnetic Interference Electro Static Discharge Equivalent Series Resistance Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Frequency Division Duplex Front End Module Firmware Over AT commands Firmware Over The Air File Transfer Protocol Firmware Ground Global Navigation Satellite System General Purpose Input Output General Packet Radio Service Global Positioning System Human Body Model High Speed Inter Chip High
18. Reserved gt 12S GPIO Reserved gt 12S GPIO Reserved gt 12S GPIO Appendix Page 155 of 162 VP biox Pin No 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 90 91 92 152 TOBY L1 Pin Name RSVD RSVD SIM_CLK SIM IO SIM RST VSIM GPIO5 GPIO6 RSVD RSV RSV RSV RSV RSV RSV GND VCC 0 9 90 KIK GND RSVD GND RSVD GND ANT1 GND RSVD GND ANT2 GND RSVD GND Description Reserved Reserved SIM Clock Output SIM Data I O SIM Reset Output SIM Supply Output GPIO GPIO Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Ground Module Supply Input 3 40 V 4 50 V normal range No 2G current pulses No switch on applying VCC Ground Reserved Ground Reserved Ground RF Antenna Input Output Two LTE bands No 3G bands No 2G bands Ground Reserved Ground RF Antenna Input LTE MIMO 2x2 No 3G Rx diversity Ground Reserved Ground TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual TOBY L2 Pin Name SCL SDA SIM CLK SIM IO SIM RST VSIM GPIO5 GPIO6 HOST SELECT1 DIO D2 DIO CLK DIO CMD DIO DO DIO Di GND ANT DET GND RSVD GND ANTI GND RSVD GND ANT2 GND RSVD GND Description PC Clock Output PC Data VO SIM Clock Output SIM Data O SIM Reset Output SIM Supply Output GPIO SIM detection GPIO Input
19. SMS texting during online command mode the DCD line changes to guarantee the correct behavior for all the scenarios For example in case of SMS texting in online command mode if the data call is released DCD is kept ON till the SMS command execution is completed even if the data call release would request DCD set OFF If AT amp CO is set the DCD module output line is set by default to the ON state low level at UART initialization and is then always held in the ON state For the definition of the interface data mode command mode and online command mode see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 48 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual RI signal behavior The RI module output line is set by default to the OFF state high level at UART initialization The RI line can notify an incoming call the RI line is switched from the OFF state to the ON state with a 4 1 duty cycle and a 5 s period ON for 1 s OFF for 4 s see Figure 21 until the DTE attached to the module sends the ATA string and the module accepts the incoming data call The RING string sent by the module DCE to the serial port at constant time intervals is not correlated with the switch of the RI line to the ON state 1s gt RI OFF RI ON CT E DESS 0 5 10 15 time s Call incomes Figure 21 RI behavior during an incoming call L RI line incomin
20. are not exceeded place the protecting device along the path from the DC source toward the module preferably closer to the DC source otherwise protection functionality may be compromised 2 2 1 10 Guidelines for grounding layout design Good connection of the module GND pins with application board solid ground layer is required for correct RF performance It significantly reduces EMC issues and provides a thermal heat sink for the module Connect each GND pin with application board solid GND layer It is strongly recommended that each GND pad surrounding VCC pins have one or more dedicated via down to the application board solid ground layer The VCC supply current flows back to main DC source through GND as ground current provide adequate return path with suitable uninterrupted ground plane to main DC source It is recommended to implement one layer of the application board as ground plane as wide as possible If the application board is a multilayer PCB then all the board layers should be filled with GND plane as much as possible and each GND area should be connected together with complete via stack down to the main ground layer of the board If the whole application device is composed by more than one PCB then it is required to provide a good and solid ground connection between the GND areas of all the different PCBs Good grounding of GND pads also ensures thermal heat sink This is critical during connection when the real network commands the mo
21. cnQu blox com Support support cnQu blox com Regional Office China Shenzhen Phone 86 755 8627 1083 E mail info cnQu blox com Support support cnQu blox com Regional Office India Phone 91 959 1302 450 E mail mailto info_in u blox com Support mailto support inQu blox com Regional Office Japan Osaka Phone 81 6 6941 3660 E mail info jpQu blox com Support support jpQu blox com Regional Office Japan Tokyo Phone 81 3 5775 3850 E mail info jpQu blox com Support support jpQu blox com Regional Office Korea Phone 82 2 542 0861 E mail info krGu blox com Support support krGu blox com Regional Office Taiwan Phone 886 2 2657 1090 E mail info twQu blox com Support support twQu blox com Contact Page 162 of 162
22. described in Figure 51 to the V_INT 1 8 V supply output of the module by means of a strong e g 1 kQ pull up resistor as the R1 resistor in Figure 51 Provide a weak e g 470 kQ pull down resistor at the SIM detection line as the R2 resistor in Figure 51 Provide a 100 nF bypass capacitor e g Murata GRM155R71C104K at the SIM supply line close to the related pad of the SIM connector to prevent digital noise Provide a bypass capacitor of about 22 pF to 47 pF e g Murata GRM1555C1H470J on each SIM line very close to each related pad of the SIM connector to prevent RF coupling especially in case the RF antenna is placed closer than 10 30 cm from the SIM card holder Provide a very low capacitance i e less than 10 pF ESD protection e g Tyco PESD0402 140 on each externally accessible SIM line close to each related pad of the SIM connector ESD sensitivity rating of the SIM interface pins is 1 kV HBM so that according to the EMC ESD requirements of the custom application higher protection level can be required if the lines are externally accessible on the application device Limit capacitance and series resistance on each SIM signal to match the SIM requirements 27 7 ns is the maximum allowed rise time on clock line 1 0 us is the maximum allowed rise time on data and reset lines i SIM CARD TOBY L2 series HOLDER TP v INT E o ES e sw1 GPIO5 KT e e sw2
23. for detailed characteristics see the TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 and measures the resulting DC voltage thus determining the resistance from the antenna connector provided on the application board to GND So the requirements to achieve antenna detection functionality are the following an RF antenna assembly with a built in resistor diagnostic circuit must be used an antenna detection circuit must be implemented on the application board See section 2 4 2 for antenna detection circuit on application board and diagnostic circuit on antenna assembly design in guidelines 1 8 SIM interface 1 8 1 SIM interface TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules provide high speed SIM ME interface including automatic detection and configuration of the voltage required by the connected SIM card or chip Both 1 8 V and 3 V SIM types are supported Activation and deactivation with automatic voltage switch from 1 8 V to 3 V are implemented according to ISO IEC 7816 3 specifications The VSIM or UIM PWR supply output provides internal short circuit protection to limit start up current and protect the SIM to short circuits The SIM driver supports the PPS Protocol and Parameter Selection procedure for baud rate selection according to the values determined by the SIM card or chip 1 8 2 SIM detection interface Le SIM detection GPIO5 is not available on MPCI L2 series modules L SIM detection GPIO5 is not supported by TOBY L2 00 01 and 60 product
24. which may create ringing and loss of a square wave shape The most appropriate value for the series damping resistors on the SDIO lines depends on the specific line lengths and layout implemented In general the SDIO series resistors are not strictly required but it is recommended to slow the SDIO signal for example with 22 O or 33 Q resistors and avoid any possible ringing problem without violating the rise fall time requirements The V INT supply output pin of the cellular module is connected to the shutdown input pin SHDNn of the two LDO regulators providing the 3 3 V and 1 8 V supply rails for the u blox ELLA W1 series Wi Fi module with appropriate pull down resistors to avoid an improper switch on of the Wi Fi module before the switch on of the V INT supply source of the cellular module SDIO interface pins The GPIO1 pin of the cellular module is connected to the active low full power down input pin PDn of the u blox ELLA W1 series Wi Fi module implementing the Wi Fi enable function The configuration pin CFG of the u blox ELLA W1 series Wi Fi module is connected to ground by means of a proper pull down resistor for operation without sleep clock The sleep clock input pin SLEEP CLK of the u blox ELLA W1 series Wi Fi module is left not connected because an external clock source is not required The WLAN LED open drain output pin LED O0 of the u blox ELLA W1 series Wi Fi module is connected to an LED with appropriate current lim
25. 00 product version is integrated into an application board using all the available interfaces and functions of the module 3V8 330pF 100nF 10nF 68pF 8 2pF 15pF Application processor Open drain Open drain USB 2 0 host TP TOBY L200 00S TOBY L210 00S vcc vcc vcc co m EN m co PWR_ON output TP RESET_N output EB vos i USB D USB_D EN co TXD RXD RTS CTS DTR DSR RI DCD GND LJ HOST SELECTO EE HOST SELECT1 RSVD RSVD NI Primary ANTI EN cellular antenna Secondary cellular antenna ANT2 IE ANT DET MAINT TP SDA Ei sc ET SIM card connector VSIM HEUTE CCVCC C1 CCVPP C6 SIM IO CCIO C7 SIM CLK CCCLK C3 SIM RST CCRST C2 E Zeg T GND C5 oer ae 47pF 47pF 100nF Espl Espl esp ren 12S_RXD DS TXD DS CLK DS WA SDIO_DO SDIO_D1 SDIO_D2 SDIO_D3 SDIO_CLK SDIO_CMD WWAN Sa indicator GPIO1 GPIO2 GPIO3 GPIOA GPIO5 GPIO6 GND Figure 75 Example of schematic diagram to integrate a TOBY L200 00S or TOBY L210 00S in an application using all interfaces UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 133 of 162 biox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 16 2 Schematic for TOBY L2 module 01 or 60 product versions
26. 1 15 5 Dual stack IPVAVIPv6 oo RR 61 t56 TCP IP arid E EE 61 UE MEE o 61 IIT EN LINUM 62 SUNL 62 1 15 10 AssistNow clients and GNSS integration eee 62 1 15 11 Hybrid positioning and CellLocate sssssssssseeeee enne 62 UNE SEET 65 1 15 13 Firmware update Over AT FOAT cctesicatstoinsiansdvceedentewnsd ai gege eege ASS 65 1 15 14 Firmware update Over The Air OTA 65 1 15 15 In band Modem eCall ERA GLONASS eene nennen 66 1 15 16 SIM Access Profile SAP Hee enmnennnnnnnennnennnen nnne ener esee nennen 66 1 15 17 Smart temperature management emen 67 IE EE 69 E c Mc 70 2 1 EEN 70 2 2 SUDply ne 71 2 2 1 Module supply VCC OF 3 3VaUX ii ttes espina ersten eiat da ede peuple deeg 71 2 2 2 RTC supply output V BCKR ennemi aaO rre en ne enne enn nnns 83 2 2 3 Generic digital interfaces supply output V INT eene 85 2 3 System functions Interfaces sc eset taedet eene RR RR er ated e tU At aestas RR teg sand edet egets d 86 2 3 1 Module power om XP Tel CN 86 2 3 2 Module reset RESET Nor DERSTA eere eer eene rene rene ee ree rnc 87 2 3 3 Module configuration selection by host Drocessor eene 88 KENE Wl ET 89 2 4 1 Antenna RF interfaces ANTT ZANTZ ee emen nemen er nennen nene nnns sen
27. 1v8 T VCC VCCA VCCB 4 um V INT TA DIR1 oo P TD a B1 TXD oo ig RxD a2 B2 RXD DIR2 OE GND r e 2p DTR DSR RI DCD GND RTS es GND Figure 61 UART interface application circuit with partial V 24 link 3 wire in DTE DCE serial communication 3 0 V DTE Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer C1 C2 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 1096 16 V GRM155R61A104KA01 Murata U1 Unidirectional Voltage Translator SN74AVC2T245 Texas Instruments Table 37 Component for UART application circuit with partial V 24 link 3 wire in DTE DCE serial communication 3 0 V DTE Voltage translator providing partial power down feature so that the DTE 3 0 V supply can be also ramped up before V INT 1 8 V supply UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 110 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Additional considerations If a 3 0 V Application Processor DTE is used the voltage scaling from any 3 0 V output of the DTE to the corresponding 1 8 V input of the module DCE can be implemented as an alternative low cost solution by means of an appropriate voltage divider Consider the value of the pull up integrated at the input of the module DCE for the correct selection of the voltage divider resistance values and mind that any DTE signal connected to the module must be tri stated or set lo
28. 20 l 1 3 5 7 11 N A 13 16 17 19 23 25 28 30 33 44 46 47 49 51 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Description USB Data Line D USB Data Line D LED indicator output Wireless radio disable input Not connected Table 4 MPCI L2 series module pin definition grouped by function UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Remarks USB interface for AT commands data communication FOAT FW update by u blox EasyFlash tool and diagnostic 90 Q nominal differential impedance Z 30 Q nominal common mode impedance Zey Pull up or pull down resistors and external series resistors as required by the USB 2 0 specifications 7 are part of the USB pad driver and need not be provided externally See section 1 9 1 for functional description See section 2 6 1 for external circuit design in USB interface for AT commands data communication FOAT FW update by u blox EasyFlash tool and diagnostic 90 Q nominal differential impedance Z 30 Q nominal common mode impedance Zey Pull up or pull down resistors and external series resistors as required by the USB 2 0 specifications 7 are part of the USB pad driver and need not be provided externally See section 1 9 1 for functional description See section 2 6 1 for external circuit design in Open drain active low output See section 1 12 for functional description See section 2 9 for external circuit design in Internal
29. 22 KQ pull up to 3 3Vaux See section 1 12 for functional description See section 2 9 for external circuit design in Internally not connected See section 1 14 for the description System description Page 19 of 162 biox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 4 Operating modes TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules have several operating modes The operating modes are defined in Table 5 and described in detail in Table 6 providing general guidelines for operation General Status Power down Normal Operation Table 5 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules operating modes definition Operating Mode Not Powered Mode Power Off Mode Idle Mode UBX 13004618 R12 Operating Mode Definition Not Powered Mode Power Off Mode Idle Mode Active Mode Connected Mode Description Module is switched off Application interfaces are not accessible odule is switched off normal shutdown by an appropriate power off event see 1 6 2 pplication interfaces are not accessible PCI L2 modules do not support Power Off Mode but halt mode see 1 6 2 and u blox AT Commands anual 3 AT CFUN 127 command gt odule is switched on with application interfaces disabled or suspended the module is temporarily not ready to communicate with an external device by means of the application interfaces as configured to reduce the current consumption The module enters the low power idle mode
30. 5 V output only RTC backup function not available 4 RSVD Reserved VUSB_DET 5 VINT Interfaces Supply Output V_INT 1 8 V output 6 RSVD Reserved RSVD 7 9 RSVD Reserved RSVD 0 RSVD Reserved DSR 1 RSVD Reserved RI 2 RSVD Reserved DCD 3 RSVD Reserved DTR 4 RSVD Reserved RTS 5 RSVD Reserved CTS 6 RSVD Reserved TXD yj RSVD Reserved RXD 8 19 RSVD Reserved RSVD 20 PWR ON Power on Input PWR ON No internal pull up 21 GPIO1 GPIO GPIO1 WWAN status indication on 00 product version 22 GPIO2 GPIO GPIO2 23 RESET_N Reset signal Input RESET_N Internal 10k pull up to V_BCKP Switch off function only 24 GPIO3 GPIO GPIO3 25 GPIO4 GPIO GPIO4 26 RSVD Reserved HOST_SELECTO 27 USB_D USB Data I O D USB_D 28 USB_D USB Data I O D USB_D 29 RSVD Reserved RSVD 30 GND Ground GND 31 RSVD Reserved RSVD 32 GND Ground GND 33 43 RSVD Reserved RSVD 44 GND Ground GND 45 RSVD Reserved RSVD 46 GND Ground GND 47 49 RSVD Reserved RSVD 50 RSVD Reserved DS WA 51 RSVD Reserved DS TXD 52 RSVD Reserved I2S_CLK 53 RSVD Reserved I2S_RXD Not supported by 00 01 02 60 product versions Not supported by 00 product versions Not supported by 00 01 60 product versions Not supported by current product version UBX 13004618 R12 Description Reserved Ground RTC Supply Input Output 3 0 V output 1 4 V 4 2 V input RTC backup VBUS USB supply 5 V detection Interfaces Supply Output 1 8 V output Reserved T
31. Body Model according to JESD22 A1 14 Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting a general purpose ESD protection e g EPCOS CAO5P4S14THSG varistor array close to accessible points 2 7 1 2 Guidelines for digital audio layout design l S interface and clock output lines require the same consideration regarding electro magnetic interference as any other high speed digital interface Keep the traces short and avoid coupling with RF lines parts or sensitive analog inputs since the signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency 2 7 1 3 Guidelines for analog audio layout design Accurate design of the analog audio circuit is very important to obtain clear and high quality audio The GSM signal burst has a repetition rate of 217 Hz that lies in the audible range A careful layout is required to reduce the risk of noise from audio lines due to both VCC burst noise coupling and RF detection If the TS digital audio pins are not used they can be left unconnected on the application board General guidelines for the uplink path microphone which is commonly the most sensitive are the following Avoid coupling of any noisy signal to microphone lines it is strongly recommended to route microphone lines away from module VCC supply line any switching regulator line RF antenna lines digital lines and any other possible noise source Avoid co
32. CFUN 127 OK 3 3Vaux sentto the module replied by the module can be removed Y 3 3Vaux PERST Internal Reset System State BB Pads State Figure 16 MPCI L2 series power off procedure description L The duration of each phase in the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules switch off routines can largely vary depending on the application network settings and the concurrent module activities UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 34 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 6 3 Module reset TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules can be properly reset rebooted by AT CFUN command see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 MPCI L2 series modules can be additionally properly reset rebooted by AT CPWROFF command see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 the behavior differs than TOBY L2 series as MPCI L2 modules will reboot rather than remain switched off due to modules internal configuration In the cases listed above an internal or software reset of the module is executed the current parameter settings are saved in the module s non volatile memory and a proper network detach is performed An abrupt hardware reset occurs on TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules when a low level is applied on the RESET N or PERST input pin for a specific time period In this case the current parameter settings are not saved in the module s non volatile memory and a proper network de
33. D Band 1 2100 MHz e TOBY L220 D Band 19 850 MHz D Band 8 900 MHz D Band 1 2100 MHz e TOBY L280 MPCI L280 Band 5 850 MHz Band 8 900 MHz Band 2 1900 MHz Band 1 2100 MHz WCDMA HSDPA HSUPA Power Class e Class 3 24 dBm for UMTS HSDPA HSUPA mode Data rate e xxxx L200 TOBY L201 e HSDPA cat 14 up to 21 Mb s DU e HSUPA cat 6 up to 5 6 Mb s UL e Xx L210 TOBY L220 xxxx L280 e HSDPA cat 24 up to 42 Mb s DL e HSUPA cat 6 up to 5 6 Mb s UL Table 2 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series LTE 3G and 2G characteristics summary 2G GSM GPRS EDGE 3GPP Release 8 Enhanced Data rate GSM Evolution EDGE GSM EGPRS Radio Access GERA Time Division Multiple Access TDMA DL Advanced Rx Performance DARP Phase 1 Band support TOBY L200 MPCI L200 GSM 850 MHz E GSM 900 MHz DCS 1800 MHz PCS 1900 MHz TOBY L210 MPCI L210 D GSM 850 MHz D E GSM 900 MHz D DCS 1800 MHz D PCS 1900 MHz TOBY L280 MPCI L280 GSM 850 MHz E GSM 900 MHz DCS 1800 MHz PCS 1900 MHz GSM GPRS GMSK Power Class Class 4 33 dBm for GSM E GSM bands Class 1 30 dBm for DCS PCS bands EDGE 8 PSK Power Class Class E2 27 dBm for GSM E GSM bands Class E2 26 dBm for DCS PCS bands Data rate GPRS multi slot class 12 CS1 CS4 up to 85 6 kb s DL UL EDGE multi slot class 12 MCS1 MCS9 up to 236 8 kb s DL UL TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules support all E UTRA channel bandwidths for each operating
34. In general a separation of at least a quarter wavelength between the two antennas is required to achieve a good isolation and low pattern correlation As numerical example the physical restriction to the PCB design can be considered as following Frequency 750 MHz gt Wavelength 40 cm gt Minimum GND plane size 10 cm UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 89 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual o Radiation performance depends on the whole PCB and antenna system design including product mechanical design and usage Antennas should be selected with optimal radiating performance in the operating bands according to the mechanical specifications of the PCB and the whole product o It is recommended to select a pair of custom antennas designed by an antennas manufacturer if the required ground plane dimensions are very small e g less than 6 5 cm long and 4 cm wide The antenna design process should begin at the start of the whole product design process o It is highly recommended to strictly follow the detailed and specific guidelines provided by the antenna manufacturer regarding correct installation and deployment of the antenna system including PCB layout and matching circuitry o Further to the custom PCB and product restrictions antennas may require tuning to obtain the required performance for compliance with all the applicable required certification schemes It is recom
35. L2 series Data Sheet 1 or MPCI L2 series Data Sheet 2 Special precautions are required when handling the pins for ESD handling guidelines see section 3 2 2 15 1 ESD immunity test overview The immunity of devices integrating TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules to Electro Static Discharge ESD is part of the Electro Magnetic Compatibility EMC conformity which is required for products bearing the CE marking compliant with the R amp TTE Directive 99 5 EC the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC issued by the Commission of the European Community Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms for device ESD immunity ESD testing standard CENELEC EN 61000 4 2 23 and the radio equipment standards ETSI EN 301 489 1 24 ETSI EN 301 489 7 25 ETSI EN 301 489 24 26 which requirements are summarized in Table 48 The ESD immunity test is performed at the enclosure port defined by ETSI EN 301 489 1 24 as the physical boundary through which the electromagnetic field radiates If the device implements an integral antenna the enclosure port is seen as all insulating and conductive surfaces housing the device If the device implements a removable antenna the antenna port can be separated from the enclosure port The antenna port includes the antenna element and its interconnecting cable surfaces The applicability of ESD immunity test to the whole device depends on the devi
36. Production Information System description Page 45 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 9 2 2 UART interface configuration The UART interface of TOBY L2 series modules is available as AT command interface with the default configuration described in Table 11 for more details and information about further settings see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 Interface AT Settings Comments UART interface AT interface enabled AT command interface is enabled by default on the UART physical interface AT IPR 0 One shot autobauding enabled by default on the modules AT ICF 3 1 8N1 frame format enabled by default AT amp K3 HW flow control enabled by default AT amp S1 DSR line Circuit 107 in ITU T V 24 set ON in data mode and set OFF in command mode AT amp D1 Upon an ON to OFF transition of DTR line Circuit 108 2 in ITU T V 24 the module DCE enters online command mode and issues an OK result code AT amp C1 DCD line Circuit 109 in ITU T V 24 changes in accordance with the Carrier detect status ON if the Carrier is detected OFF otherwise MUX protocol disabled Multiplexing mode is disabled by default and it can be enabled by AT CMUX command For more details see the Mux Implementation Application Note 12 The following virtual channels are defined e Channel 0 Control channel e Channel 1 5 AT commands data connection e Channel 6 GNSS tunneling not supported by 00 01 02 60 pr
37. Provide a bypass capacitor of about 22 pF to 47 pF e g Murata GRM1555C1H470J on each SIM line very close to each related pad of the SIM connector to prevent RF coupling especially in case the RF antenna is placed closer than 10 30 cm from the SIM card holder Provide a very low capacitance i e less than 10 pF ESD protection e g Tyco PESD0402 140 on each externally accessible SIM line close to each relative pad of the SIM connector ESD sensitivity rating of the SIM interface pins is 1 kV HBM So that according to EMC ESD requirements of the custom application higher protection level can be required if the lines are externally accessible on the application device Limit capacitance and series resistance on each SIM signal to match the SIM requirements 27 7 ns is the maximum allowed rise time on clock line 1 0 us is the maximum allowed rise time on data and reset lines SIM CARD TOBY L2 series HOLDER VPP C6 VsiM EIN e o e L VCC C1 SIM IO e e IO C7 SIM CLK EJ D D CLK C3 SIM_RST ER e e RST C2 SIM Card X GND C5 Pad od cal C2 C3 C4 Cl pil po p3 pa n SIM CARD MPCI L2 series HOLDER VPP C6 UIM PWR ER e o H a VCC C1 UIM DATA ET e e IO C7 UIM CLK REJ D D CLK C3 UIM RESET REM e e RST C2 gt SM Card ottom View al c2 ca al cs KENN idi contacts side J1
38. Speed Downlink Packet Access High Speed Uplink Packet Access HyperText Transfer Protocol Hardware In phase and Quadrature Inter Integrated Circuit interface Inter IC Sound interface Internet Protocol Low Dropout Land Grid Array Early Production Information Appendix Page 158 of 162 biox LNA LPDDR LTE 2M BIM IMO A N A NCM OTA PA PCM PCN IN PCS PFM PMU PWM QPSK RF RMII RNDIS RSE RTC SAW SDIO SIM SMS SRF SSL TBD TCP TDD TDMA TIS TP TRP UART UDP UICC UL UMTS USB VCO VoLTE VSWR Wi Fi WLAN WWAN UBX 13004618 R12 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Low Noise Amplifier Low Power Double Data Rate synchronous dynamic RAM memory Long Term Evolution Machine to Machine Mobile Broadband Interface Model Multi Input Multi Output Not Applicable Not Available Network Control Model Over The Air Power Amplifier Pulse Code Modulation Product Change Notification Information Note Personal Communications Service Pulse Frequency Modulation Power Management Unit Pulse Width Modulation Quadrature Phase Shift Keying Radio Frequency Reduced Media Independent Interface Remote Network Driver Interface Specification Radiated Spurious Emission Real Time Clock Surface Acoustic Wave Secure Digital Input Output Subscriber Identification Module Short Message Service Self Resonant Frequency Secure Socket Layer To Be Defined Transmission Contro
39. These capacitors allow the time reference to run during battery disconnection a TOBY L2 series b TOBY L2 series c TOBY L2 series EN v BCKP EH v BckP DEE v BCKP ae e Ss de P C1 C2 T B3 superCap Figure 40 Real time clock supply V BCKP application circuits a using a 100 pF capacitor to let the RTC run for 80 s after VCC removal b using a 70 mF capacitor to let RTC run for 15 hours after VCC removal c using a non rechargeable battery Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer C1 100 uF Tantalum Capacitor GRMA3SR60J107M Murata R2 4 7 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RC0402JR 074K7L Yageo Phycomp C2 70 mF Capacitor XH414H IVO1E Seiko Instruments Table 22 Example of components for V_BCKP buffering If very long buffering time is required to allow the RTC time reference to run during a disconnection of the VCC supply then an external battery can be connected to V_BCKP pin The battery should be able to provide a proper nominal voltage and must never exceed the maximum operating voltage for V_BCKP specified in the Input characteristics of Supply Power pins table in TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 The connection of the battery to V_BCKP should be done with a suitable series resistor for a rechargeable battery or with an appropriate series diode for a non rechargeable battery The purpose of the series resistor is to limit the battery charging current due to the
40. UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 46 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual CTS signal behavior The module hardware flow control output CTS line is set to the ON state low level at UART initialization If the hardware flow control is enabled as it is by default the CTS line indicates when the UART interface is enabled data can be received the module drives the CTS line to the ON state or to the OFF state when it is either able or not able to accept data from the DTE over the UART for example see section 1 9 2 4 Figure 23 L The module guarantees the reception of characters when the CTS line is set to the ON state and the module is also able to accept up to 3 characters after the CTS line is set to the OFF state L If hardware flow control is enabled then when the CTS line is OFF it does not necessarily mean that the module is in low power idle mode but only that the UART is not enabled as the module could be forced to stay in active mode for other activities e g related to the network or related to other interfaces L If hardware flow control is enabled and the multiplexer protocol is active then the CTS line state is mapped to FCon FCoff MUX command for flow control matters outside the power saving configuration while the physical CTS line is still used as a UART power state indicator see the Mux Implementation Application Note 12 The CTS hard
41. UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 68 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Threshold Definitions When the application of cellular module operates at extreme temperatures with Smart Temperature Supervisor enabled the user should note that outside the valid temperature range the device will automatically shut down as described above The input for the algorithm is always the temperature measured within the cellular module Ti internal This value can be higher than the working ambient temperature Ta ambient as for example during transmission at maximum power a significant fraction of DC input power is dissipated as heat This behavior is partially compensated by the definition of the upper shutdown threshold t that is slightly higher than the declared environmental temperature limit The temperature thresholds are defined according the Table 14 Symbol Parameter Temperature Remarks Equal to the absolute minimum temperature rating for the wireless t Low temperature shutdown SSC module the lower limit of the extended temperature range t Low temperature warning 30 C 10 C above t 20 C below t The higher warning area for upper range ensures that t ZE EE 477 C any countermeasures used to limit the thermal heating will become 1 9 P g effective even considering some thermal inertia of the complete assembly Equal to the internal temperature Ti measured in
42. When the modules are switched on by an appropriate enabled or not suspended the module is ready to power on event see 1 6 1 the module enter active mode communicate with an external device by means of from power off mode the application interfaces unless power saving H power saving configuration is enabled by the AT UPSV configuration is enabled by AT UPSV see 1 9 1 4 command the module automatically switches from active 1 9 2 4 and u blox AT Commands Manual 3 to idle mode whenever possible and the module wakes up from idle to active mode in the events listed above see idle mode to active mode transition description above When a RF Tx Rx data connection is initiated or when RF Tx Rx is required due to a connection previously initiated the module switches from active to connected mode Connected Mode RF Tx Rx data connection is in progress When a data connection is initiated the module enters The module is prepared to accept data signals fom connected mode from active mode an external device unless power saving configuration If power saving configuration is enabled by the AT UPSV is enabled by AT UPSV see sections 1 9 1 4 1 9 2 4 command the module automatically switches from and u blox AT Commands Manual 3 connected to active and then idle mode whenever possible and the module wakes up from idle to active and then connected mode if RF Transmission Reception is necessary When a data connection is terminated the module re
43. avoid voltage drop undershoot and overshoot at the start and end of a transmit burst during a GSM call when current consumption on the VCC or 3 3Vaux supply can rise up as specified in TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 or in MPCI L2 series Data Sheet 2 place a bypass capacitor with large capacitance at least 100 uF and low ESR near the VCC pins for example 330 pF capacitance 45 MQ ESR e g KEMET T520D337MOO6ATE045 Tantalum Capacitor To reduce voltage ripple and noise improving RF performance especially if the application device integrates an internal antenna place the following bypass capacitors near the VCC 3 3Vaux pins 68 pF capacitor with Self Resonant Frequency in the 800 900 MHz range e g Murata GRM1555C1H680J to filter EMI in the RF low frequencies bands 15 pF capacitor with Self Resonant Frequency in 1800 1900 MHz range e g Murata GRM1555C1E150J to filter EMI in the RF high frequencies bands 8 2 pF capacitor with Self Resonant Frequency in 2500 2600 MHz range e g Murata GRM1555C1H8R2D to filter EMI in the RF very high frequencies band 10 nF capacitor e g Murata GRM155R71C103K to filter digital logic noise from clocks and data sources 100 nF capacitor e g Murata GRM155R61C104K to filter digital logic noise from clocks and data sources A suitable series ferrite bead can be properly placed on the VCC 3 3Vaux line for additional noise filtering if required by the specific application according to the whole applic
44. battery specifications and also to allow a fast rise time of the voltage value at the V_BCKP pin after the VCC supply has been provided The purpose of the series diode is to avoid a current flow from the module V_BCKP pin to the non rechargeable battery UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 83 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual L If the RTC timing is not required when the VCC supply is removed it is not needed to connect the V_BCKP pin to an external capacitor or battery In this case the date and time are not updated when VCC is disconnected If VCC is always supplied then the internal regulator is supplied from the main supply and there is no need for an external component on V_BCKP Combining a cellular module with a u blox GNSS positioning receiver the positioning receiver VCC supply is controlled by the cellular module by means of the GNSS supply enable function provided by the GPIO2 of the cellular module In this case the V_BCKP supply output of the cellular module can be connected to the V_BCKP backup supply input pin of the GNSS receiver to provide the supply for the positioning real time clock and backup RAM when the VCC supply of the cellular module is within its operating range and the VCC supply of the GNSS receiver is disabled This enables the u blox GNSS receiver to recover from a power breakdown with either a hot start or a warm start depending on the duration
45. be minimized as much as possible in the order of a few tenths of a dB e Add GND keep out i e clearance a void area on buried metal layers below any pad of component present on the RF transmission lines if top layer to buried layer dielectric thickness is below 200 um to reduce parasitic capacitance to ground e The transmission lines width and spacing to GND must be uniform and routed as smoothly as possible avoid abrupt changes of width and spacing to GND e Add GND stitching vias around transmission lines as described in Figure 47 e Ensure solid metal connection of the adjacent metal layer on the PCB stack up to main ground layer providing enough vias on the adjacent metal layer as described in Figure 47 e Route RF transmission lines far from any noise source as switching supplies and digital lines and from any sensitive circuit as USB e Avoid stubs on the transmission lines e Avoid signal routing in parallel to transmission lines or crossing the transmission lines on buried metal layer e Donotroute microstrip lines below discrete component or other mechanics placed on top layer An example of proper RF circuit design is reported in Figure 47 In this case the ANT1 and ANT2 pins are directly connected to SMA connectors by means of proper 50 transmission lines designed with proper layout TOBY L2 series SMA Connector Secondary Antenna SMA Connector Primary Antenna Figure 47 Suggested circuit and layou
46. be picked up and create self interference that can reduce the sensitivity of LTE 3G 2G receiver channels whose carrier frequency is coincidental with harmonic frequencies It is strongly recommended to place the RF bypass capacitors suggested in Figure 49 near the SIM connector In addition since the SIM card is typically accessed by the end user it can be subjected to ESD discharges Add adequate ESD protection as suggested to protect module SIM pins near the SIM connector Limit capacitance and series resistance on each SIM signal to match the SIM specifications The connections should always be kept as short as possible Avoid coupling with any sensitive analog circuit since the SIM signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 105 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 6 Data communication interfaces 2 6 1 Universal Serial Bus USB 2 6 1 1 Guidelines for USB circuit design The USB_D and USB_D lines carry the USB serial data and signaling The lines are used in single ended mode for full speed signaling handshake as well as in differential mode for high speed signaling and data transfer USB pull up or pull down resistors and external series resistors on USB Dr and USB D lines as required by the USB 2 0 specification 7 are part of the module USB pin driver and do not need to be externally provided
47. by the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules through the VCC or 3 3Vaux pins can vary by several orders of magnitude depending on radio access technology operation mode and state It is important that the supply source is able to support both the high peak of current consumption during 2G transmission at maximum RF power level as described in the section 1 5 1 2 and the high average current consumption during 3G and LTE transmission at maximum RF power level as described in the sections 1 5 1 3 and 1 5 1 4 1 5 1 1 VCC or 3 3Vaux supply requirements Table 7 summarizes the requirements for the VCC or 3 3Vaux modules supply See section 2 2 1 for suggestions to properly design a VCC or 3 3Vaux supply circuit compliant with the requirements listed in Table 7 A The supply circuit affects the RF compliance of the device integrating TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules with applicable required certification schemes as well as antenna circuit design Compliance is guaranteed if the requirements summarized in the Table 7 are fulfilled Item Requirement Remark VCC or 3 3Vaux Within VCC or 3 3Vaux normal operating range The modules cannot be switched on if the supply voltage nominal voltage See Supply Power pins section in the TOBY L2 Data is below the normal operating range minimum limit Sheet 1 or in the MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 VCC or 3 3Vaux Within VCC or 3 3Vaux extended operating range The modules may switch off if the supply voltage dro
48. card hot insertion removal PS digital audio interface Master clock output Wi Fi enable Wi Fi data ready Wi Fi reset Wi Fi power saving 32 kHz clock output Antenna tuning DSR DTR DCD RI General purpose input General purpose output Pin disabled Description Network status registered home network registered roaming data transmission no service Enable disable the supply of u blox GNSS receiver connected to cellular module Sense when u blox GNSS receiver connected to the module is ready for sending data by the DDC lC SIM card physical presence detection SIM card hot insertion removal 12S digital audio interface 13 MHz 26 MHz clock output for an external device as an audio codec or an external Wi Fi chip module Enable disable the supply of the external Wi Fi chip or module connected to the cellular module Sense when the external Wi Fi chip module connected to the cellular module is ready for sending data by the SDIO waking up the cellular module from low power idle mode Reset the external Wi Fi chip or module connected to the cellular module Enable disable the low power mode of the external Wi Fi chip module connected to the cellular module 32 kHz clock output for an external Wi Fi chip or module 4 bit tunable antenna control signals mapping the actual operating RF band over a 4 pin interface provided for the implementation of external antenna tuning solutions UART dat
49. circuits If the external reset function is not required by the customer application the RESET_N input pin can be left unconnected to external components but it is recommended providing direct access on the application board by means of an accessible test point directly connected to the RESET_N pin UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 87 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 3 2 2 Guidelines for RESET N and PERST layout design The RESET N and PERST circuits require careful layout due to the pin function ensure that the voltage level is well defined during operation and no transient noise is coupled on this line otherwise the module might detect a spurious reset request It is recommended to keep the connection line to RESET N and PERST pins as short as possible 2 3 3 Le Module configuration selection by host processor The HOST_SELECTO and HOST_SELECT1 pins are not available on MPCI L2 series modules 2 3 3 4 Guidelines for HOST_SELECTx circuit design LS The functionality of HOST_SELECTO and HOST_SELECT1 pins is not supported by the TOBY L2 modules 00 01 02 and 60 product versions the two input pins should not be driven by the host application processor or any other external device TOBY L2 series modules include two input pins HOST SELECTO and HOST SELECT for the selection of the module configuration by the host application processor L
50. command see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 IPR L One shot automatic baud rate recognition autobauding is enabled by default UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 44 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual The following baud rates can be configured by AT command see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 IPR 9600 b s 19200 b s 38400 b s 57600 b s 115200 b s default value when one shot autobauding is disabled 230400 b s 460800 b s 921600 b s The following frame formats can be configured by AT command see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 ICF Le 8N2 8 data bits no parity 2 stop bits 8N1 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit default frame format 8E1 8 data bits even parity 1 stop bit 801 8 data bits odd parity 1 stop bit 7N2 7 data bits no parity 2 stop bits 7N1 7 data bits no parity 1 stop bit 7E1 7 data bits even parity 1 stop bit 701 7 data bits odd parity 1 stop bit Automatic frame recognition is not supported by 00 01 02 and 60 product versions Figure 20 describes the 8N1 frame format which is the default frame format configuration Normal Transfer 8N1 Start of 1 Byte Possible Start of ls next Start Bit fso Bit Always 0 Always 1 tht 1 Baudrate Figure 20 Description of UART default frame format 8N1 i e 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit UBX 13004618 R12 Early
51. configuration by the host processor Primary antenna Secondary antenna Antenna detection Remarks VCC pins are internally connected each other VCC supply circuit affects the RF performance and compliance of the device integrating the module with applicable required certification schemes See section 1 5 1 for functional description and requirements for the VCC module supply See section 2 2 1 for external circuit design in GND pins are internally connected each other External ground connection affects the RF and thermal performance of the device See section 1 5 1 for functional description See section 2 2 1 for external circuit design in V BCKP 3 0 V typical generated by internal regulator when valid VCC supply is present See section 1 5 2 for functional description See section 2 2 2 for external circuit design in V INT 1 8 V typical generated by internal regulator when the module is switched on See section 1 5 3 for functional description See section 2 2 3 for external circuit design in nternal active pull up to the VCC enabled See section 1 6 1 for functional description See section 2 3 1 for external circuit design in nternal active pull up to the VCC enabled See section 1 6 3 for functional description See section 2 3 2 for external circuit design in Not supported by 00 01 02 60 product versions See section 1 6 4 for functional description See section 2 3 3 for
52. data If the DTE sends data the first character sent causes the UART and module wake up after 5 ms recognition of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the complete wake up and the UART will be then kept enabled after the last data received according to the timeout previously set with the AT UPSV 1 configuration see the following subsection wake up via data reception UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 52 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual The module automatically enters the low power idle mode whenever possible but it wakes up to active mode according to any required activity related to the network e g for the periodic paging reception described in section 1 5 1 5 or for any other required RF signal transmission or reception or any other required activity related to the functions interfaces of the module The AT UPSV 3 configuration can be enabled regardless the flow control setting on UART In particular the HW flow control can be enabled AT amp K3 or disabled AT amp KO on UART during this configuration In both cases with the AT UPSV 3 configuration the CTS line indicates when the module is either able or not able to accept data from the DTE over the UART When the AT UPSV 3 configuration is enabled the DTR input line can still be used by the DTE to control the module behavior according to AT amp D command configuration see u blox AT commands M
53. efficiency of the switching regulator diminishes the benefit of voltage step down and no true advantage is gained in input current savings On the opposite side linear regulators are not recommended for high voltage step down as they dissipate a considerable amount of energy in thermal power See 2 2 1 3 2 2 1 6 2 2 1 9 2 2 1 10 for specific design in If TOBY L2 modules are deployed in a mobile unit where no permanent primary supply source is available then a battery will be required to provide VCC A standard 3 cell Li lon or Li Pol battery pack directly connected to VCC is the usual choice for battery powered devices During charging batteries with Ni MH chemistry typically reach a maximum voltage that is above the maximum rating for VCC and should therefore be avoided See 2 2 1 4 2 2 1 6 2 2 1 9 2 2 1 10 for specific design in Keep in mind that the use of rechargeable batteries requires the implementation of a suitable charger circuit which is not included in the modules The charger circuit has to be designed to prevent over voltage on VCC pins of the module and it should be selected according to the application requirements a DC DC switching UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 71 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual charger is the typical choice when the charging source has an high nominal voltage e g 12 V whereas a linear charger is the typical choice when the char
54. for detail usage of the AT command L These kinds of test may be useful as a go no go test but not for RF performance measurements This test is suitable to check the functionality of communication with host controller SIM card as well as power supply It is also a means to verify if components at antenna interface are well soldered 5 2 2 RF functional tests The overall RF functional test of the device including the antenna can be performed with basic instruments such as a spectrum analyzer or an RF power meter and a signal generator with the assistance of AT UTEST command over AT command user interface The AT UTEST command provides a simple interface to set the module to Rx or Tx test modes ignoring the LTE 3G 2G signaling protocol The command can set the module into transmitting mode in a specified channel and power level in all supported modulation schemes and bands receiving mode in a specified channel to returns the measured power level in all supported bands L See the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 and the End user test Application Note 32 for the AT UTEST command syntax description and detail guide of usage UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Product testing Page 151 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual This feature allows the measurement of the transmitter and receiver power levels to check component assembly related to the module antenna interface and to check ot
55. for mobile and fixed or mobile operating configurations The gain of the system antenna s used for TOBY L201 modules i e the combined transmission line connector cable losses and radiating element gain must not exceed 6 7 dBi 700 MHz i e LTE FDD 17 band 6 9 dBi 750 MHz i e LTE FDD 13 band 6 7 dBi 850 MHz i e UMTS FDD 5 or LTE FDD 5 band 6 8 dBi 1700 MHz i e AWS or LTE FDD 4 band 8 5 dBi 1900 MHz i e UMTS FDD 2 or LTE FDD 2 band for mobile and fixed or mobile operating configurations The gain of the system antenna s used for TOBY L280 MPCI L280 modules i e the combined transmission line connector cable losses and radiating element gain must not exceed 1 0 dBi 850 MHz i e GSM 850 or UMTS FDD 5 or LTE FDD 5 band 3 4 dBi 1900 MHz i e GSM 1900 or UMTS FDD 2 or LTE FDD 2 band 7 8 dBi 2500 MHz i e LTE FDD 7 band for mobile and fixed or mobile operating configurations 4 3 2 Modifications The IC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by u blox could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Manufacturers of mobile or fixed devices incorporating the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules are authorized to use the Industry Canada Certificates of the TOBY L2 series modules for their own final products according to the conditions referenced in the certificates The IC Label shall in the above case be visible from the outsi
56. from operation on a live network described in the GSMA TS 09 Battery Life Measurement and Current Consumption Technique 22 however the application should be correctly designed to cope with it During transmission at maximum RF power the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules generate thermal power that may exceed 3 W this is an indicative value since the exact generated power strictly depends on operating condition such as the actual antenna return loss the number of allocated TX resource blocks the transmitting frequency band etc The generated thermal power must be adequately dissipated through the thermal and mechanical design of the application The spreading of the Module to Ambient thermal resistance Rth M A depends on the module operating condition The overall temperature distribution is influenced by the configuration of the active components during the specific mode of operation and their different thermal resistance toward the case interface L The Module to Ambient thermal resistance value and the relative increase of module temperature will differ according to the specific mechanical deployments of the module e g application PCB with different dimensions and characteristics mechanical shells enclosure or forced air flow The increase of the thermal dissipation i e the reduction of the Module to Ambient thermal resistance will decrease the temperature of the modules internal circuitry for a given operating ambient temper
57. generic digital interfaces 1 8 V supply output which can be mainly used to Indicate when the module is switched on as described in sections 1 6 1 1 6 2 Pull up SIM detection signal see section 2 5 for more details Supply voltage translators to connect 1 8 V module generic digital interfaces to 3 0 V devices e g see 2 6 2 Pull up DDC I C interface signals see section 2 6 3 for more details Supply a 1 8 V u blox 6 or subsequent u blox GNSS receiver generation see section 2 6 3 for more details Enable external voltage regulators providing supply for external devices as linear LDO regulators providing the 3 3 V 1 8 V supply rails for a u blox ELLA W1 series module see section 2 6 4 for more details Supply an external device as an external 1 8 V audio codec see section 2 7 1 for more details V_INT supply output pin provides internal short circuit protection to limit start up current and protect the device in short circuit situations No additional external short circuit protection is required Le Le Le Le Le Do not apply loads which might exceed the limit for maximum available current from V_INT supply see the TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 as this can cause malfunctions in internal circuitry Since the V_INT supply is generated by an internal switching step down regulator the V_INT voltage ripple can range as specified in the TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 it is not recommended to supply sensitive analog ci
58. in Portuguese Anatel Anatel IDs for the TOBY L200 00S modules EAN barcode 01 07898941575236 Homologation number 0806 15 5903 Anatel IDs for the MPCI L200 00S modules EAN barcode 01 07898941575243 Homologation number 3420 13 5903 4 5 R amp TTED and European Conformance CE mark The TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series cellular modules except TOBY L201 and TOBY L220 have been evaluated against the essential requirements of the 1999 5 EC Directive In order to satisfy the essential requirements of the 1999 5 EC Directive the modules are compliant with the following standards Radio Frequency spectrum use R amp TTE art 3 2 o EN 301 511 V9 0 2 o EN 301 908 1 V6 2 1 o EN 301 908 2 V6 2 1 o EN 301 908 13 V6 2 1 Electromagnetic Compatibility R amp TTE art 3 1b o EN301 489 1 V1 9 2 o EN 301 489 7 V1 3 1 o EN 301 489 24 V1 5 1 Health and Safety R amp TTE art 3 1a o EN 60950 1 2006 A11 2009 A1 2010 A12 2011 A2 2013 o EN 62311 2008 Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information this equipment complies with radiation exposure limits prescribed for an uncontrolled environment for fixed and mobile use conditions This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and the body of the user or nearby persons This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except as authorized in the certification of the produc
59. known position GPS GLONASS satellites a A gt E Cellular network KE adj 41 See Public Safety LE S j aa In vehicle emergency call system voice data Figure 28 eCall and ERA GLONASS automated emergency response systems diagram flow For more details regarding the In band Modem solution for the European eCall and the Russian ERA GLONASS emergency call applications see the u blox eCall ERA GLONASS Application Note 20 1 15 16 SIM Access Profile SAP L SIM Access Profile SAP is not supported by TOBY L2 modules 00 01 02 60 product versions or by MPCI L2 series modules SIM access profile SAP feature allows accessing and using a remote SIM card chipping instead of the local SIM directly connected to the module SIM interface A dedicated SAP channel over USB and a dedicated multiplexed SAP channel over UART are implemented for communication with the remote SIM card chip Communication between TOBY L2 series module and the remote SIM is conformed to client server paradigm The module is the SAP client establishing a connection and performing data exchange to a SAP server directly connected to the remote SIM that is used by the module for LTE 3G 2G network related operations The SAP communication protocol is based on the SIM Access Profile Interoperability Specification 21 A typical application using the SAP feature is the scenario where a device such as an embedded car phone with an integrated TO
60. o e e e F F e e F ee oe oe o o eee F F Oo as E o 265 SES oO ogc soe LEE HL Ou d 2 c Us d o e E ir iF m m F e e F e e F m supported by all product versions except versions 00 60 F supported by future product versions Table 50 Summary of TOBY L1 series and TOBY L2 series modules interfaces Figure 84 summarizes the LTE 3G and 2G operating frequency bands of TOBY L1 and TOBY L2 series modules HB 4 4 TOBY L100 eme TFETTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT d TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT 700 750 800 850 900 950 1700 1750 1800 1850 1900 1950 2000 2050 2100 2150 2200 2500 2550 2600 2650 2700 746 787 1710 2155 E m 5 5 4 2 2 4 m Hl V V 1 1 wilt vm Ru D DU WV TOBY L200 850 850 1900 1900 900 900 1800 1800 700 750 800 850 900 950 1700 1750 1800 1850 1900 1950 2000 2050 2100 2150 2200 2500 2550 2600 2650 27
61. of the positioning VCC outage and to maintain the configuration settings saved in the backup RAM See section 2 6 3 for more details regarding the application circuit with a u blox GNSS receiver V_BCKP supply output pin provides internal short circuit protection to limit start up current and protect the device in short circuit situations No additional external short circuit protection is required L Do not apply loads which might exceed the limit for maximum available current from V_BCKP supply see TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 as this can cause malfunctions in internal circuitry L ESD sensitivity rating of the V_BCKP supply pin is 1 kV Human Body Model according to JESD22 A1 14 Higher protection level could be required if the line is externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection e g EPCOS CAO5P4S14THSG varistor array close to the accessible point 2 2 2 2 Guidelines for V_BCKP layout design V_BCKP supply requires careful layout avoid injecting noise on this voltage domain as it may affect the stability of the internal circuitry UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 84 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 2 3 Generic digital interfaces supply output V INT Le The generic digital interfaces supply V_INT pin is not available on MPCI L2 series modules 2 2 3 1 Guidelines for V INT circuit design TOBY L2 series provide the V_INT
62. out comparison between TOBY L1 and TOBV L3 eee eee 155 A 3 Schematic for TOBY L1 and TOBY L2 Integration 157 E IpARRLT Cen 158 Related documents E 160 Revision histOF y eegene 161 jd rp Mp er 162 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Contents Page 7 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 System description 1 1 Overview TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series comprises LTE 3G 2G multi mode modules supporting up to six LTE bands up to five UMTS DC HSPA bands and up to four GSM E GPRS bands for voice and or data transmission as following TOBY L200 TOBY L201 and MPCI L200 are designed primarily for operation in America TOBY L210 and MPCI L210 are designed primarily for operation in Europe Asia and other countries TOBY L220 is designed primarily for operation in Japan TOBY L280 and MPCI L280 are designed primarily for operation in Asia and Oceania TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series are designed in two different form factors suitable for applications as following TOBY L2 modules are designed in the small TOBY 152 pin Land Grid Array form factor 35 6 x 24 8 mm easy to integrate in compact designs and form factor compatible with the u blox cellular module families this allows customers to take the maximum advantage of their hardware and software investments and provides very short time to market The modules are the perfect choice for consumer fixed wireless terminals mo
63. qui fonctionnent dans des conditions d exposition des appareils mobiles les antennes se situent plus de 20 centim tres du corps d une personne Ce p riph rique est homologu pour l utilisation au Canada Pour consulter l entr e correspondant l appareil dans la liste d quipement radio REL Radio Equipment List d Industrie Canada rendez vous sur http www ic gc ca app sitt reltel srch nwRdSrch do lang fra Pour des informations suppl mentaires concernant l exposition aux RF au Canada rendez vous sur http www ic gc ca eic site smt gst nsf fra sf08792 html IMPORTANT les fabricants d applications portables contenant les modules TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series doivent faire certifier leur produit final et d poser directement leur candidature pour une certification FCC ainsi que pour un certificat Industrie Canada d livr par l organisme charg de ce type d appareil portable Ceci est obligatoire afin d tre en accord avec les exigences SAR pour les appareils portables Tout changement ou modification non express ment approuv par la partie responsable de la certification peut annuler le droit d utiliser l quipement UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Approvals Page 147 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 4 4 Anatel certification TOBY L200 00S and MPCI L200 00S modules are certified by the Brazilian Agency of Telecommunications Ag ncia Nacional de Telecomunica es
64. the MPCI L2 module to the main ground of the application board with suitable screws and fasteners d Follow the recommendations provided by the connector manufacturer and the guidelines available in the PCI Express Mini Card Electromechanical Specification 16 for the development of the footprint i e the copper mask PCB layout for the mating edge system connector The exact geometries distances and stencil thicknesses should be adapted to the specific production processes e g soldering etc L Follow the recommendations provided by the connector manufacturer to properly insert and remove the MPCI L2 series modules UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 127 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual MPCI L2 series modules are equipped with two Hirose U FL R SMT RF receptacles for ANT1 ANT2 ports which require a suitable mated RF plug from the same connector series as the examples listed in Table 25 To mate the connectors the mating axes of both connectors must be aligned The click will confirm the fully mated connection Do not attempt to insert on an extreme angle insert the RF plug connectors vertically into the ANT1 ANT2 RF receptacles of the modules as described in Figure 73 E E f E 1 1 Co rrect Figure 73 Precautions during RF connector mating To unplug the RF cable assembly it is encouraged to use a suitable extractio
65. the base board etc AN Exceeding the maximum soldering temperature and the maximum liquidus time limit in the recommended soldering profile may permanently damage the module Peak Temp 245 C Liquidus Temperature max 4 C s Typical Leadfree Soldering Profile Elapsed time s Figure 79 Recommended soldering profile L The modules must not be soldered with a damp heat process 3 3 3 Optical inspection After soldering the TOBY L2 series modules inspect the modules optically to verify that the module is properly aligned and centered 3 3 4 Cleaning Cleaning the modules is not recommended Residues underneath the modules cannot be easily removed with a washing process e Cleaning with water will lead to capillary effects where water is absorbed in the gap between the baseboard and the module The combination of residues of soldering flux and encapsulated water leads to short circuits or resistor like interconnections between neighboring pads Water will also damage the sticker and the ink jet printed text e Cleaning with alcohol or other organic solvents can result in soldering flux residues flooding into the two housings areas that are not accessible for post wash inspections The solvent will also damage the sticker and the ink jet printed text e Ultrasonic cleaning will permanently damage the module in particular the quartz oscillators For best results use a no clean soldering paste and elimina
66. the worst case to High temperature shutdown 497 C operating condition at typical supply voltage when the ambient temperature Ta in the reference setup equals the absolute maximum temperature rating upper limit of the extended temperature range Module mounted on a 79 mm x 62 mm x 1 46 mm 4 Layers PCB with a high coverage of copper within climatic chamber Table 14 Thresholds definition for Smart Temperature Supervisor L The sensor measures board temperature inside the shields which can differ from ambient temperature 1 15 18 Power saving The power saving configuration is by default disabled but it can be enabled using the AT UPSV command for the complete description of the AT UPSV command see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 When power saving is enabled the module automatically enters the low power idle mode whenever possible reducing current consumption see section 1 5 1 5 TOBY L2 Data Sheet 1 and MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 During the low power idle mode the module is not ready to communicate with an external device as it is configured to reduce power consumption The module wakes up from low power idle mode to active mode in the following events Automatic periodic monitoring of the paging channel for the reception of the paging block sent by the base station according to network conditions see section 1 5 1 5 The connected USB host forces a remote wakeup of the module as USB device see section 1 9 1 4 Auto
67. to improve the integration with u blox GNSS receivers GNSS receiver power on off GNSS supply enable function over the GPIO2 pin improves the positioning receiver power consumption When the GNSS functionality is not required the positioning receiver can be completely switched off by the cellular module controlled by the application processor over AT commands The wake up from low power idle mode when the GNSS receiver is ready to send data GNSS data ready function over the GPIO3 pin improves the cellular module power consumption When power saving is enabled in the cellular module by the AT UPSV command and the GNSS receiver does not send data over the dedicated DDC I C interface the cellular module automatically enters low power idle mode whenever possible With the GNSS data ready function the GNSS receiver can indicate to the cellular module that it is ready to send data the positioning receiver can wake up the cellular module to avoid data loss even if power saving is enabled UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 55 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 9 4 Secure Digital Input Output interface SDIO L Secure Digital Input Output interface is not available on MPCI L2 series modules L Secure Digital Input Output interface is not supported by TOBY L2 00 01 60 product versions TOBY L2 series modules include a 4 bit Secure Digital Input Outpu
68. um L2 Copper 35 um Figure 55 Example of USB line design with Z close to 90 and Z close to 30 Q for the described 2 layer board layup UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 107 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 6 2 Asynchronous serial interface UART Le The UART interface is not available on MPCI L2 series modules 2 6 2 1 Guidelines for UART circuit design L The UART interface is not supported by TOBY L2 modules 00 product versions all the UART pins should not be driven by any external device Providing the full RS 232 functionality using the complete V 24 link If RS 232 compatible signal levels are needed two different external voltage translators can be used to provide full RS 232 9 lines functionality e g using the Texas Instruments SN74AVC8T245PW for the translation from 1 8 V to 3 3 V and the Maxim MAX3237E for the translation from 3 3 V to RS 232 compatible signal level If a 1 8 V Application Processor DTE is used and complete RS 232 functionality is required then the complete 1 8 V UART interface of the module DCE should be connected to a 1 8 V DTE as described in Figure 56 TOBY L2 series 1 8V DCE TXD RXD RTS Application Processor 1 8V DTE TxD RxD RTS CTS e Gd cts DTR de DTR DSR RI DCD GND T DSR RI DCD GND AAA amp Figure 56 UART interf
69. versions The GPIO5 pin is by default configured to detect the SIM card mechanical physical presence The pin is configured as input with an internal active pull down enabled and it can sense SIM card presence only if properly connected to the mechanical switch of a SIM card holder as described in section 2 5 Low logic level at GPIO5 input pin is recognized as SIM card not present High logic level at GPIO5 input pin is recognized as SIM card present The SIM card detection function provided by GPIO5 pin is an optional feature that can be implemented used or not according to the application requirements an Unsolicited Result Code URC is generated each time that there is a change of status for more details see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 UGPIOC CIND CMER The optional function SIM card hot insertion removal can be additionally enabled on the GPIOS5 pin by specific AT command see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 UDCONF 50 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 39 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 9 Data communication interfaces TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules provide the following serial communication interface USB interface High Speed USB 2 0 compliant interface available for the communication with an external host application processor for AT commands data communication FW upgrade by means of the FOAT feature FW upgrade by means o
70. whenever possible if power saving is enabled by AT UPSV see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 reducing current consumption see 1 5 1 5 With HW flow control enabled and AT UPSV 1 or AT UPSV 3 the UART CTS line indicates when the UART is enabled see 1 9 2 3 1 9 2 4 With HW flow control disabled the UART CTS line is fixed to ON state see 1 9 2 3 Power saving configuration is not enabled by default it can be enabled by the AT UPSV command see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 Early Production Information VCC or 3 3Vaux supply not present or below operating range module is switched off VCC or 3 3Vaux supply within operating range and module is switched off Module processor core runs with 32 kHz reference generated by the internal oscillator Module processor core runs with 26 MHz reference generated by the internal oscillator RF Tx Rx data connection enabled and processor core runs with 26 MHz reference Transition between operating modes When VCC or 3 3Vaux supply is removed the modules enter not powered mode When in not powered mode TOBY L2 modules cannot be switched on by PWR_ON RESET_N or RTC alarm and enter active mode after applying VCC supply see 1 6 1 When in not powered mode MPCI L2 modules cannot be switched on by RTC alarm and enter active mode after applying 3 3Vaux supply see 1 6 1 When the modules are switched off by an appropriate power off event see 1 6 2 the modules enter power off mode fr
71. 0 6 3 V O uF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0603 20 6 3 V 27 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 596 25 V O nF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0402 1096 50V Low Capacitance ESD Protection Chip Ferrite Bead Noise EMI Suppression Filter 800 Ohm at 100 MHz 2700 Ohm at 1 GHz Microphone Connector Speaker Connector 2 2 kQ Electret Microphone 4 7 kO Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W 10 kO Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W 2 2 kO Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W 32 Q Speaker 16 Bit Mono Audio Voice Codec Part Number Manufacturer GRM155R71C104KA01 Murata GRM155R60J105KE19 Murata GRM188R60J106ME47 Murata GRM1555C1H270JZ01 Murata GRM155R71C103KA88 Murata USBOOO2RP or USB0002DP AVX BLM15HD182SN1 Murata Various manufacturers Various manufacturers Various manufacturers RC0402JR 074K7L Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR 0710KL Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR 072K2L Yageo Phycomp Various manufacturers MAX9860ETG Maxim Table 42 Example of components for audio voice codec application circuit Do not apply voltage to any l S pin before the switch on of a supply source V INT to avoid latch up of circuits and allow a proper boot of the module If the external signals connected to the cellular module cannot be tri stated or set low insert a multi channel digital switch e g Tl SN74CB3Q16244 T 5A3159 or TS5A63157 between the two circuit connections and set to high impedance before V INT switch on ESD sensitivity rating of TS interface pins is 1 kV Human
72. 00 704 960 1710 2170 2500 2690 Eg Si B a 2 z 7 TOBY L201 SR v v IC ON 1 i 700 750 800 850 900 950 1700 1750 1800 1850 1900 1950 2000 2050 2100 2150 2200 2500 2550 2600 2650 2700 1 1 i i 704 894 1710 2155 EZ LTE FDD bands 5 5 H WCDMA bands 20 20 8 8 3 3 1 1 7 z 1 GSM bands v v D 1 b escenas vir DN 1 M TOBY L210 850 850 1900 1900 900 900 1800 1800 700 750 800 850 900 950 1700 1750 1800 1850 1900 1950 2000 2050 2100 2150 2200 2500 2550 2600 2650 2700 791 960 1710 2170 2500 2690 19 19 BN E 8 8 1 1 TOBY L220 Kal x vir vir T T TOT et Tt TO 700 750 800 850 900 950 1700 1750 1800 1850 1900 1950 2000 2050 2100 2150 2200 2500 2550 2600 2650 2700 824 960 1920 2170 BH E 28 SIS 3 3 1 1 7 7 v D 1 1 vir vir SIE D TOBY L280 sso 850 1900 1900 900 900 1800 1800 TETTTDDTDTTTTFTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT FEFETTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTETTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT DFTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT 700 750 800 850 900 950 1700 1750 1800 1850 1900 1950 2000 2050 2100 2150 2200 2500 2550 2600 2650 2700 703 960 1710 2170 2500 2690 Figure 84 Summary of TOBY L1 and TOBY L2 series modules LTE 3G and 2G operating frequency bands UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Appendix Page 154 of 162 biox A 2 Pin out comparison between TOBY L1 and TOBY L2 TOBY L1 TOBY L2 Pin No Pin Name Description Pin Name 1 RSVD Reserved RSVD 2 GND Ground GND 3 V_BCKP RTC Supply Output V_BCKP 2
73. 02 196 0 063 W RCO402FR 07910RL Yageo R3 82 Q Resistor 0402 596 0 063 W RC0402JR 0782RL Yageo RA 8 2 kO Resistor 0402 596 0 063 W RC0402JR 078K2L Yageo R5 39 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 063 W RC0402JR 0739KL Yageo R6 1 5 kO Resistor 0402 196 0 063 W RCO402FR 071K5L Yageo R7 330 Q Resistor 0402 1 0 063 W RCO402FR 07330RL Yageo U1 Step Down Regulator 8 VFQFPN 3 A 1 MHz L5987TR ST Microelectronics Table 16 Components for low cost VCC and 3 3Vaux supply application circuit using a step down regulator UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 74 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 2 1 3 Guidelines for VCC or 3 3Vaux supply circuit design using a Low Drop Out linear regulator The use of a linear regulator is suggested when the difference from the available supply rail and the VCC or the 3 3Vaux value is low The linear regulators provide high efficiency when transforming a 5 VDC supply to a voltage value within the module VCC or 3 3Vaux normal operating range The characteristics of the Low Drop Out LDO linear regulator connected to VCC or 3 3Vaux pins should meet the following prerequisites to comply with the module VCC or 3 3Vaux requirements summarized in Table 7 Power capabilities the LDO linear regulator with its output circuit must be capable of providing a voltage value to the VCC or 3 3Vaux pins within the specified operating range and must be capable o
74. 1 and the The required frequency range of the antenna connected MPCI L2 series Data Sheet 2 to ANT1 port depends on the operating bands of the used cellular module and the used mobile network Return Loss S lt 10 dB VSWR lt 2 1 recommended The Return loss or the S as the VSWR refers to the S lt 6 dB VSWR lt 3 1 acceptable amount of reflected power measuring how well the primary antenna RF connection matches the 50 Q characteristic impedance of the ANT1 port The impedance of the antenna termination must match as much as possible the 50 O nominal impedance of the ANT1 port over the operating frequency range reducing as much as possible the amount of reflected power Efficiency gt 1 5 dB gt 7096 recommended The radiation efficiency is the ratio of the radiated power 3 0 dB 5096 acceptable to the power delivered to antenna input the efficiency is a measure of how well an antenna receives or transmits The radiation efficiency of the antenna connected to the ANT1 port needs to be enough high over the operating frequency range to comply with the Over The Air OTA radiated performance requirements as Total Radiated Power TRP and the Total Isotropic Sensitivity TIS specified by applicable related certification schemes Maximum Gain According to radiation exposure limits The power gain of an antenna is the radiation efficiency multiplied by the directivity the gain describes how much power is transm
75. 2 A ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 4 2 US Federal Communications Commission notice United States Federal Communications Commission FCC IDs u blox TOBY L200 cellular modules XPYTOBYL200 u blox TOBY L201 cellular modules XPYTOBYL201 u blox TOBY L210 cellular modules XPYTOBYL210 u blox TOBY L280 cellular modules XPYTOBYL280 u blox MPCI L200 cellular modules Contains FCC ID XPYTOBYL200 u blox MPCI L210 cellular modules Contains FCC ID XPYTOBYL210 u blox MPCI L280 cellular modules Contains FCC ID XPYTOBYL280 4 2 1 Safety warnings review the structure Equipment for building in The requirements for fire enclosure must be evaluated in the end product The clearance and creepage current distances required by the end product must be withheld when the module is installed The cooling of the end product shall not negatively be influenced by the installation of the module Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss No natural rubbers hygroscopic materials or materials containing asbestos are employed 4 2 2 Declaration of Conformity This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions this device may not cause harmful interference this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information this equipment compl
76. 201 cellular modules 8595A TOBYL201 u blox TOBY L210 cellular modules 8595A TOBYL210 u blox TOBY L280 cellular modules 8595A TOBYL280 u blox MPCI L200 cellular modules Contains IC 8595A TOBYL200 u blox MPCI L210 cellular modules Contains IC 8595A TOBYL2 10 u blox MPCI L280 cellular modules Contains IC 8595A TOBYL280 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Approvals Page 145 of 162 A ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 4 3 1 Declaration of Conformity Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information this equipment complies with radiation exposure limits prescribed for an uncontrolled environment for fixed and mobile use conditions This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and the body of the user or nearby persons This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except as authorized in the certification of the product The gain of the system antenna s used for the TOBY L200 TOBY L210 MPCI L200 MPCI L210 modules i e the combined transmission line connector cable losses and radiating element gain must not exceed 9 8 dBi 700 MHz i e LTE FDD 17 band 4 3 dBi 850 MHz i e GSM 850 or UMTS FDD 5 or LTE FDD 5 band 5 5 dBi 1700 MHz i e AWS or UMTS FDD 4 or LTE FDD 4 band 2 8 dBi 1900 MHz i e GSM 1900 or UMTS FDD 2 or LTE FDD 2 band 6 0 dBi 2500 MHz i e LTE FDD 7 band
77. 2100 6 850 900 2100 6 850 900 1900 2100 850 900 6 AWS 1900 2100 6 850 900 1900 2100 6 850 900 1900 2100 e supported by all product versions o supported by all product versions except version 00 GSM GPRS EDGE multi slot class EN N D iS Di o 12 Quad 12 Quad 12 Quad 12 Quad 12 Quad TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Positioning Interfaces Audio Features Grade ke 8 n Lo Loi o D ao n S EOS c Eg d 432 E 3 S SO BH 23 ai Ze o E Sex PTE OF 5899 c o Yor VY m gt gt Qu g 5 Q3 SD E Oe o E zx to 5S5 E Go D o o gw ez co 6 om e 3 x o vo o c Uo o B 2e gt Zol o g ga EIU gx Moog 2n Seos ens QE Zaz beg 22g aaanu E oe ZZ ER S Sik SS v N VU 6640558 a0 42 a Shoe WW i E a EF FE Fiole a O O Cr or A ES er OSEE oS F F Fle o F FF F oe F o F o o o F F F o e m m nm Rene F m mnm F FF Ee o o o o e e ee F o o o D F FF o o o e o e o o o F o o o D e e e F o o o D e D e E oo o D e e e F o o e m supported by all product versions except versions 00 60 F supported by future product versions Table 1 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series main features summary UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 9 of 162 VP biox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Table 2 reports a summary of cellular radio access technologies characteristics and features of the modules 4G LTE
78. 3GPP Release 9 Long Term Evolution LTE Evolved Uni Terrestrial Radio Access E UTRA Frequency Division Duplex FDD DL Multi Input Multi Output MIMO 2 x 2 Band support e OBY L200 MPCI L200 Band 17 700 MHz Band 5 850 MHz Band 4 AWS i e 1700 MHz Band 2 1900 MHz Band 7 2600 MHz e TOBY L201 D Band 17 700 MHz D Band 13 750 MHz D Band 5 850 MHz D Band 4 AWS i e 1700 MHz D Band 2 1900 MHz e OBY L210 MPCI L210 D Band 20 800 MHz D Band 5 850 MHz D Band 8 900 MHz D Band 3 1800 MHz D Band 1 2100 MHz D Band 7 2600 MHz e TOBY L220 D Band 19 850 MHz D Band 5 850 MHz D Band 8 900 MHz D Band 3 1800 MHz D Band 1 2100 MHz e OBY L280 MPCI L280 D Band 28 750 MHz D Band 5 850 MHz D Band 8 900 MHz D Band 3 1800 MHz D Band 1 2100 MHz D Band 7 2600 MHz LTE Power Class e Class 3 23 dBm for LTE mode Data rate e LTE category 4 up to 150 Mb s DL 50 Mb s UL 3G UMTS HSDPA HSUPA 3GPP Release 8 Dual Cell HS Packet Access DC HSPA UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access UTRA Frequency Division Duplex FDD DL Rx diversity Band support e TOBY L200 MPCI L200 Band 5 850 MHz Band 8 900 MHz Band 4 AWS i e 1700 MHz Band 2 1900 MHz Band 1 2100 MHz e TOBY L201 D Band 5 850 MHz H Band 2 1900 MHz Ae es E Ee e TOBY L210 MPCI L210 D Band 5 850 MHz e Band 8 900 MHz D Band 2 1900 MHz
79. 3Vaux supply can be removed An abrupt hardware shutdown occurs on TOBY L2 series modules when a low level is applied on the RESET_N pin for a specific time period In this case the current parameter settings are not saved in the module s non volatile memory and a proper network detach is not performed Le It is highly recommended to avoid an abrupt hardware shutdown of the module by forcing a low level on the RESET_N input pin during module normal operation the RESET_N line should be set low only if reset or shutdown via AT commands fails or if the module does not reply to a specific AT command after a time period longer than the one defined in the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 An over temperature or an under temperature shutdown occurs on TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules when the temperature measured within the cellular module reaches the dangerous area if the optional Smart Temperature Supervisor feature is enabled and configured by the dedicated AT command For more details see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 USTS AT command L The Smart Temperature Supervisor feature is not supported by the 00 01 60 product versions UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 33 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Figure 15 describes the TOBY L2 power off sequence by means of AT CPWROFF with the following phases e When the CPWROFF AT command is sent the module star
80. 555C1E150JA01 Murata C9 C15 8 2 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 596 50 V GRM1555C1H8R2DZ01 Murata C10 330 pF Capacitor Tantalum D SIZE 6 3 V 45 mQ T520D337MO006ATEO045 KEMET C12 O nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10 16 V GRM155R71C103KA01 Murata D1 D2 Low Capacitance ESD Protection CG0402MLE 18G Bourns R1 R3 R5 0 kQ Resistor 0402 5 1 16 W RC0402JR 0710KL Yageo Phycomp R2 0 KQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RC0402JR 071KOL Yageo Phycomp R4 22 kQ Resistor 0402 5 1 16 W RCO0402JR 0722KL Yageo Phycomp L1 2 uH Inductor 6 A 21 mQ 20 7447745012 Wurth U1 Li lon Li Polymer Battery DC DC Charger Regulator MP2617 Monolithic Power Systems MPS with integrated Power Path Management function Table 21 Suggested components for Li lon or Li Polymer battery charging and power path management application circuit UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 81 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 2 1 9 Guidelines for VCC or 3 3Vaux supply layout design Good connection of the module VCC or 3 3Vaux pins with DC supply source is required for correct RF performance Guidelines are summarized in the following list All the available VCC 3 3Vaux pins must be connected to the DC source VCC 3 3Vaux connection must be as wide as possible and as short as possible Any series component with Equivalent Series Resistance ESR greater than few milliohms must be avoided VCC 3 3Vaux con
81. 8 1 1 Guidelines for TOBY L2 series GPIO circuit design A typical usage of TOBY L2 modules GPIOs can be the following Network indication provided over GPIO1 or GPIO4 pin see Figure 67 Table 43 below GNSS supply enable provided over GPIO2 see Figure 62 Table 38 or Figure 64 Table 40 in section 2 6 3 GNSS data ready provided over GPIO3 see Figure 62 Table 38 or Figure 64 Table 40 in section 2 6 3 Wi Fi enable provided over GPIO4 or GPIO1 pin see Figure 65 Table 41 in section 2 6 4 SIM card detection provided over GPIO5 see Figure 51 Table 32 or Figure 52 Table 33 in section 2 5 Clock output provided over GPIO6G see Figure 66 Table 42 in section 2 7 1 TOBY L2 series m 3V8 R3 Ww DU Network Indicator R1 K x Ti GPIO1 ER e R2 Figure 67 Application circuit for network indication provided over GPIO1 Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer R1 10 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W Various manufacturers R2 47 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W Various manufacturers R3 820 Q Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W Various manufacturers DL1 LED Red SMT 0603 LTST C190KRKT Lite on Technology Corporation T1 NPN BJT Transistor BC847 Infineon Table 43 Components for network indication application circuit Le Le Le Use transistors with at least an integrated resistor in the base pin or otherwise put a 10 kQ resistor on the board in series to the GPIO of TOBY L2
82. 9 2 and 1 11 for functional description See section 2 6 2 and 2 8 for external circuit design in n UART DCD not supported by 00 product versions GPIO not supported by 00 01 60 versions 1 8 V Circuit 109 in ITU T V 24 configurable as GPIO Add Test Point and series 0 Q to access for diagnostic See section 1 9 2 and 1 11 for functional description See section 2 6 2 and 2 8 for external circuit design in System description Page 15 of 162 biox Function Pin Name DDC SCL SDA SDIO SDIO_DO SDIO_D1 SDIO_D2 SDIO_D3 SDIO_CLK SDIO CMD Audio HS TXD HS RXD HS CLK HS WA UBX 13004618 R12 Pin No 54 55 66 68 63 67 64 65 51 53 52 50 yo Vo Vo Vo Vo Vo Vo O Vo Vo VO Vo VO Vo TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Description l C bus clock line PC bus data line SDIO serial data 0 SDIO serial data 1 SDIO serial data 2 SDIO serial data 3 SDIO serial clock SDIO command PS transmit data GPIO l S receive data GPIO PS clock GPIO PS word alignment GPIO Remarks Not supported by 00 01 60 product versions 1 8 V open drain for communication with u blox GNSS receivers and other I2C slave devices as an audio codec External pull up required See section 1 9 3 for functional description See section 2 6 3 for external circuit design in Not su
83. AT amp C1 is set as it is by default the DCD module output line is set by default to the OFF state high level at UART initialization The module then sets the DCD line according to the carrier detect status ON if the carrier is detected OFF otherwise If a Packet Switched Data call occurs before activating the PPP protocol data mode a dial up application must provide the ATD 99 lt context_number gt to the module with this command the module switches from command mode to data mode and can accept PPP packets The module sets the DCD line to the ON state then answers with a CONNECT to confirm the ATD 99 command The DCD ON is not related to the context activation but with the data mode L The DCD is set to ON during the execution of the CMGS CMGW USOWR USODL AT commands requiring input data from the DTE the DCD line is set to the ON state as soon as the switch to binary text input mode is completed and the prompt is issued DCD line is set to OFF as soon as the input mode is interrupted or completed for more details see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 L The DCD line is kept in the ON state even during the online command mode to indicate that the data call is still established even if suspended while if the module enters command mode the DSR line is set to the OFF state For more details see DSR signal behavior description L For scenarios when the DCD line setting is requested for different reasons e g
84. BY L2 series module uses a remote SIM included in an external user device e g a simple SIM card reader or a portable phone which is brought into the car The car phone accesses the LTE 3G 2G network using the remote SIM in the external device UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 66 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 15 17 Smart temperature management L Smart temperature management is not supported by 00 01 and 60 product versions Cellular modules independent of the specific model always have a well defined operating temperature range This range should be respected to guarantee full device functionality and long life span Nevertheless there are environmental conditions that can affect operating temperature e g if the device is located near a heating cooling source if there is isn t air circulating etc The module itself can also influence the environmental conditions such as when it is transmitting at full power In this case its temperature increases very quickly and can raise the temperature nearby The best solution is always to properly design the system where the module is integrated Nevertheless an extra check security mechanism embedded into the module is a good solution to prevent operation of the device outside of the specified range Smart Temperature Supervisor STS The Smart Temperature Supervisor is activated an
85. CA 22 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 5 25 V GRM1555C1H220JZ01 Murata C5 10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 1096 16 V GRM155R71C103KA01 Murata C6 470 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0603 1096 25 V GRM188R71E474KA12 Murata C7 22 yF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 1210 1096 25 V GRM32ER61E226KE15 Murata C8 330 uF Capacitor Tantalum D SIZE 6 3 V 45 mQ T520D337M006ATE045 KEMET D1 Schottky Diode 40V 3A MBRA340T3G ON Semiconductor L1 10 pH Inductor 744066100 3096 3 6 A 744066100 Wurth Electronics R1 470 kQ Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W 2322 705 87474 L Yageo R2 15 kQ Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W 2322 705 87153 L Yageo R3 22 kQ Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W 2322 705 87223 L Yageo RA 390 kQ Resistor 0402 196 0 063 W RCO0402FR 07390KL Yageo R5 100 kQ Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W 2322 705 70104 L Yageo R6 330 kQ Resistor 0402 1 0 063 W RCO4O2FR 07330KL Yageo U1 Step Down Regulator MSOP10 3 5 A 2 4 MHz LT3972IMSE PBF Linear Technology Table 15 Components for high reliability VCC and 3 3Vaux supply application circuit using a step down regulator UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 73 of 162 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual biox Figure 33 and the components listed in Table 16 show an example of a low cost power supply circuit where the VCC module supply is provided by a step down switching regulator capable of delivering to VCC pins the specified maximum peak pulse current transforming a 12 V supply input
86. COS Reference Description ESD Varistor for ESD protection Table 44 Example of ESD protection component for the W_DISABLE application circuit L If the W_DISABLE functionality is not required by the application the pin can be left unconnected UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 123 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 9 1 2 Guidelines for LED_WWAN circuit design As described in Figure 69 and Table 45 the MPCI L2 series modules LED WWANKH active low open drain output can be directly connected to a system mounted LED to provide the Wireless Wide Area Network status indication as specified by the PCI Express Mini Card Electromechanical Specification 16 MPCI L2 series Y DL LED WWAN t Open Drain Output Figure 69 LED_WWAN application circuit Reference Description Remarks DL LED Green SMT 0603 LTST C190KGKT Lite on Technology Corporation R 470 Q Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W Various manufacturers Table 45 Example of components for the LED WWANXH application circuit L ESD sensitivity rating of the LED_WWAN pin is 1 kV Human Body Model according to JESD22 A1 14 Higher protection level could be required if the line is externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection e g EPCOS CAO5PAS14THSG varistor close to accessible point L If the LED WWANH functionality is not required by the application th
87. D GPIO1 PDn RESETn SLEEP CLK CFG GND GND Figure 65 Application circuit for connecting a TOBY L2 cellular module to a u blox ELLA W131 Wi Fi module Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer C1 C2 1 uF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0603 10 25 V GRM188R71E105KA12 Murata C3 C4 10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10 16 V GRM155R71C103KA01 Murata C5 C6 10 pF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0603 20 6 3 V GRM188R60J106ME47 Murata DL1 LED Green SMT 0603 LTST C190KGKT Lite on Technology Corporation FL1 Wi Fi 2 4 GHz band pass filter with LTE B7 coexistence B39242B9604P810 TDK EPCOS L1 15 nH Multilayer Inductor 0603 396 0 25 A MLGO0603P15NHTOOO TDK R1 470 kO Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W RK73B1ETTD474J KOA R2 R3 R4 R5 Ro R7 22 Q Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RK73B1ETTP220J KOA R8 470 Q Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W RK73B1ETTP471J KOA R9 47 kQ Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W RK73B1ETTD473 KOA U1 LDO Linear Regulator 3 0 V 0 3 A LT1962EMS8 3 3 Linear Technology U2 LDO Linear Regulator 1 8 V 0 3 A LT1962EMS8 1 8 Linear Technology Table 41 Components for connecting TOBY L2xx 50S cellular modules to u blox ELLA W1 series Wi Fi modules L Do not apply voltage to any SDIO interface pin before the switch on of SDIO interface supply source V_INT to avoid latch up of circuits and allow a proper boot of the module L ESD sensitivity rating of SDIO interface pins is 1 kV HMB according to JESD22 A114 Higher protection lev
88. D vec RN nsvD VCC EE nsvD vcc Ed pn 93 152 np D EN vov vcc E Pin 93 152 GND J EN VNT vcc EN Rsvp vcc EE vuss DET GND D D D D V_BCKP GND a be D EN veck ms unmnggump gm Sr nngugumg gm RSVD RSVD ANT DET EN Rsvo PI DT Bea pen PIDE s om A A AOA oorcoooooooo oo oO A A oO oorcoooooooo oo oO Zazzzzt2z2zoazzc22222z Zazzzzt2zzozztc2z22a22z OP ouuog ooQuozooo 0o vogpououozoopoo amp ooou tot Figure 82 TOBY L1 and TOBY L2 series modules pad layout and pin assignment TOBY modules are also form factor compatible with the u blox LISA and SARA cellular module families although TOBY modules LISA modules 33 2 x 22 4 mm 76 pin LCC and SARA modules 26 0 x 16 0 mm 96 pin LGA each have different form factors the footprints for the TOBY LISA and SARA modules have been developed to ensure layout compatibility With the u blox nested design solution any TOBY LISA or SARA module can be alternatively mounted on the same space of a single nested application board as described in Figure 83 Guidelines in order to implement a nested application board description of the u blox reference design as nested application board and comparison between TOBY LISA and SARA modules are provided in the Nested Design Application Note 34 TOBY cellular module USA cellular module Figure 83 TOBY LISA SARA modules layout compatibility the nested design accommodates all modules on the same footprint
89. D keep out i e clearance a void area around the ANT1 ANT2 pads on the top layer of the application PCB to at least 250 um up to adjacent pads metal definition and up to 400 um on the area below the module to reduce parasitic capacitance to ground as described in the left picture in Figure 43 Add GND keep out i e clearance a void area on the buried metal layer below the ANT1 ANT2 pads if the top layer to buried layer dielectric thickness is below 200 um to reduce parasitic capacitance to ground as described in the right picture in Figure 43 GND clearance GND clearance GND clearance GND clearance on top layer on very close buried layer on top layer on very close buried layer around ANT1 pad below ANT1 pad around ANT2 pad below ANT2 pad pes D e oe Min e 250 um 250 um e e e e 8 ee A 9 a GND 9 a ANT1 Min 400 pm SND ANT2 Min 400 pm Figure 43 GND keep out area on top layer around ANT1 ANT2 pads and on very close buried layer below ANT1 ANT2 pads UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 90 of 162 Qo OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Guidelines for MPCI L2 series ANT1 ANT2 receptacles RF connection design The Hirose U FL R SMT RF receptacles implemented on the MPCI L2 series modules for ANT1 ANT2 ports require a suitable mated RF plug from the same connector series Due to its wide usage in the industry several manufacturers offer compatible eq
90. D1 D8 R1 Jil J2 U1 Description 33 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 5 25 V 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10 16 V Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection 47 KQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W SIM Card Holder 6 2 p with card presence switch 4PDT Analog Switch with Low On Capacitance and Low On Resistance Part Number Manufacturer GRM1555C1H330JZ01 Murata GRM155R71C104KA01 Murata PESD0402 140 Tyco Electronics RC0402JR 0747KL Yageo Phycomp CCMO03 3013LFT R102 C amp K Components FSA2567 Fairchild Semiconductor Table 33 Example of components for the connection to two removable SIM cards with SIM detection not implemented UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 104 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 5 2 Guidelines for SIM layout design The layout of the SIM card interface lines VSIM SIM CLK SIM IO SIM RST or UIM PWR UIM DATA UIM CLK UIM RESET may be critical if the SIM card is placed far away from the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules or in close proximity to the RF antenna these two cases should be avoided or at least mitigated as described below In the first case the long connection can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency as any other digital interface It is recommended to keep the traces short and avoid coupling with RF line or sensitive analog inputs In the second case the same harmonics can
91. DTE is buffered by the DTE and will be correctly received by he module when it is ready to receive data when the UART is enabled Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE 1 Enabled AT amp K3 OFF ON or OFF Data sent by the DTE is buffered by the DTE and will be correctly received by he module when it is ready to receive data when the UART is enabled Data sent by the module is buffered by the module and will be correctly received by the DTE when it is ready to receive data i e RTS line will be ON 1 Disabled AT amp KO ON or OFF ON or OFF The first character sent by the DTE is lost by the module but after 5 ms the UART and the module are woken up recognition of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the UART module complete wake up i e after 5 ms Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive data otherwise the data is lost 2 Enabled AT amp K3 ONor OFF ON or OFF Not Applicable HW flow control cannot be enabled with AT UPSV 2 Disabled AT amp KO ON ON or OFF Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive data otherwise data is lost 2 Disabled AT amp KO OFF ON or OFF The first character sent by the DTE is lost by the module but after 5 ms the UART and the module are woken up Recognition of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the UART module complete wa
92. ESD ESD VINT Audio Codec USB 2 0 Host MAX9860 VINT H VBUS WES ksvp vuse_peT 0a TP 100nF_ 1pF _ 10pF D i USB D Dei 20 J USB_D RSVD SDA GND I E GND RSVD SCL RSVD I2S TXD RSVD 12S RXD RSVD TXD RSVD RXD RSVD 12S_CLK 10nF 27pF 27pF ESD ESI RSVD RTS RSVD DS WA RSVD CTS RSVD DTR GPIO6 RSVD DSR zr 10nF 10nF 27pF 27pF ESD ESD RSVD RI RSVD DCD ELLA W131 GND LE LDO Regulator 3V3 Wi Fi Module IN OUT SHDNn GND RSVD HOST SELECTO RSVD HOST SELECT1 Wi Fi Antenna RSVD SDIO DO p RSVD SDIO D1 RSVD SDIO D2 GPIO2 RSVD SDIO D Network Indicator E GPIO3 RSVD SDIO CLK GPIO4 RSVD SDIO_CMD EE SD CMD ff 03 si LEGEND H LI GPIO1 CC Mountfor Toe Lon RESETn ECH Mountfor TOBY L100 xx BEE TOBY L100 xx TOBY L2xx 00 CI Mount for TOBY L2wc01 TP i TOBY L2xx 60 RSVD CO Mountfor TOBY L2x xx RSVD TOBY L2xx 01 CO Mountfor TOBY L2xx 02 BS RSVD e ME f Punt lrosvazeceo ka C Mountfor TOBY L2xx 02 i Figure 85 Example of complete schematic diagram to integrate TOBY L1 modules and TOBY L2 modules 00 01 02 or 60 product versions on the same application board using all the available interfaces functions of the modules UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Appendix Page 157 of 162 biox
93. Fi Cellular Integration Application Note 15 Additional custom functions over GPIO pins are designed to improve the integration with u blox Wi Fi modules Wi Fi enable Switch on switch off the Wi Fi Wi Fi reset Reset the Wi Fi Wi Fi data ready Cellular module wake up when the Wi Fi is ready for sending data over SDIO Wi Fi power saving Enable disable the low power mode of the Wi Fi 32 kHz output Clock for the Wi Fi 26 MHz output Clock for the Wi Fi L GPIOs are not supported by TOBY L2 00 01 and 60 product versions except for the Wireless Wide Area Network status indication configured on GPIO1 pin Le GPIOs are not available on MPCI L2 series modules UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 56 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 10 Audio 1 10 1 Digital audio over I S interface L Digital audio over l S interface is not available on MPCI L2 series modules L Digital audio over S interface is not supported by TOBY L2 00 01 and 60 product versions TOBY L2 series modules include a 4 wire Ta digital audio interface I2S_TXD data output 12S_RXD data input DS CLK clock output DS WA world alignment synchronization signal output that can be configured by AT command for digital audio communication with external digital audio devices as an audio codec for more details see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 UI2S AT commana The I S inter
94. File System When Direct Link is used for a FTP file transfer only the file content pass through USB UART serial interface whereas all the FTP commands handling is managed internally by the FTP application For more details about embedded FTP functionalities see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 61 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 15 8 HTTP L Embedded HTTP services are not supported by 00 and 60 product versions TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules provide the embedded Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP services via AT commands for sending requests to a remote HTTP server receiving the server response and transparently storing itin the module s Flash File System FFS For more details about embedded HTTP functionalities see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 1 15 9 SSL TLS L Embedded Transport Layer Security TLS Secure Sockets Layer SSL protocols are not supported by the 00 01 and 60 product versions TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules provide the Transport Layer Security TLS Secure Sockets Layer SSL encryption protocols to enable security over the FTP and HTTP protocols via AT commands implementing Secure File Transfer Protocol FTPS i e FTP with TLS SSL encryption and Secure Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTPS i e HTTP with TLS SSL encryption services For more details about embedd
95. I L2 series modules 2 6 3 1 Guidelines for DDC IC circuit design L l C bus function is not supported by TOBY L2 modules 00 01 and 60 product versions the pins should not be driven by any external device L Communication with u blox GNSS receivers over DDC CH is not supported by 02 product versions General considerations The DDC l C bus master interface can be used to communicate with u blox GNSS receivers and other external TC bus slaves as an audio codec Beside the general considerations reported below see the following parts of this section for specific guidelines for the connection to u blox GNSS receivers the section 2 7 1 for an application circuit example with an external audio codec VC bus slave To be compliant with the l C bus specifications the module bus interface pads are open drain output and pull up resistors must be mounted externally Resistor values must conform to TC bus specifications 13 for example 4 7 kQ resistors can be commonly used Pull ups must be connected to a supply voltage of 1 8 V typical since this is the voltage domain of the DDC pins which are not tolerant to higher voltage values e g 3 0 V L Connect the DDC lC pull ups to the V INT 1 8 V supply source or another 1 8 V supply source enabled after V INT e g as the GNSS 1 8 V supply present in Figure 62 application circuit as any external signal connected to the DDC l C interface must not be set high before the swi
96. M contact C5 GND to ground Provide a 100 nF bypass capacitor e g Murata GRM155R71C104K at the SIM supply line close to the relative pad of the SIM chip to prevent digital noise Provide a bypass capacitor of about 22 pF to 47 pF e g Murata GRM1555C1H470J on each SIM line to prevent RF coupling especially in case the RF antenna is placed closer than 10 30 cm from the SIM lines Limit capacitance and series resistance on each SIM signal to match the SIM requirements 27 7 ns is the maximum allowed rise time on clock line 1 0 us is the maximum allowed rise time on data and reset lines TOBY L2 series SIM CHIP 2 VPP co vsiM ER e e 8 vec c1 8 C1 cs 1 SIM IO bd 3 IO C7 He C6 2 SICH Ca SIM CLK ES e 6 CLK C3 s fea cal 4 SIM_RST ER e 7 ast c2 SIM Chip 1 Bottom View cil c2 c3l cal cs GND C5 contacts side u MPCI L2 series SIM CHIP 2 VPP co UIM_PWR ER o 8 vcc c1 8 C1 C5 1 UIM DATA EIN e 3 o c7 E sf 6 C3 Ca UIM CLK e 6 CLK C3 s ca Pp UIM RESET EES e 7 RST c2 SIM Chip 1 Bottom View al cal c3l ca cs GND C5 contacts side U1 Figure 50 Application circuits for the connection to a single solderable SIM chip with SIM detection not implemented Reference Description Part
97. MC Part 4 2 Testing and measurement techniques Electrostatic discharge immunity test ETSI EN 301 489 1 V1 8 1 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters ERM EMC standard for radio equipment and services Part 1 Common technical requirements ETSI EN 301 489 7 V1 3 1 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters ERM EMC standard for radio equipment and services Part 7 Specific conditions for mobile and portable radio and ancillary equipment of digital cellular radio telecommunications systems ETSI EN 301 489 24 V1 4 1 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters ERM EMC standard for radio equipment and services Part 24 Specific conditions for IMT 2000 CDMA Direct Spread UTRA for Mobile and portable UE radio and ancillary equipment 3GPP TS 51 010 2 Technical Specification Group GSM EDGE Radio Access Network Mobile Station MS conformance specification Part 2 Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PICS 3GPP TS 34 121 2 Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network User Equipment UE conformance specification Radio transmission and reception FDD Part 2 Implementation Conformance Statement ICS 3GPP TS 36 521 1 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access User Equipment conformance specification Radio transmission and reception Part 1 Conformance Testing 3GPP TS 36 521 2 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access E UTRA User Equipment conf
98. MPCI L2 series modules which include the LED_WWAN active low open drain output to provide the Wireless Wide Area Network status indication as specified by the PCI Express Mini Card Electromechanical Specification 16 L GPIOs are not supported by TOBY L2 modules 00 01 60 product versions but the Wireless Wide Area Network status indication is by default configured on the GPIO1 pin The GPIO1 can be configured by the AT UGPIOC command for further details see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 to indicate network status as described below No service no network coverage or not registered Registered 2G 3G LTE home network Registered 2G 3G LTE visitor network roaming Call enabled RF data transmission reception 1 15 2 Antenna supervisor L Antenna supervisor i e antenna detection is not available on MPCI L2 series L Antenna supervisor i e antenna detection is not supported by TOBY L2 series modules 00 01 and 60 product versions The antenna detection function provided by the ANT DET pin is based on an ADC measurement as optional feature that can be implemented if the application requires it The antenna supervisor is forced by the UANTR AT command see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 for more details The requirements to achieve antenna detection functionality are the following an RF antenna assembly with a built in resistor diagnostic circuit must be used an antenna detection circuit m
99. Number Manufacturer C1 C2 C3 CA 47 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 596 50 V GRM1555C1H470JA01 Murata C5 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 1096 16 V GRM155R71C104KA01 Murata U1 SIM chip M2M UICC Form Factor Various Manufacturers Table 31 Example of components for the connection to a single solderable SIM chip with SIM detection not implemented UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 101 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Guidelines for single SIM card connection with detection A removable SIM card placed in a SIM card holder must be connected to the SIM card interface of TOBY L2 modules as described in Figure 51 where the optional SIM card detection feature is implemented Follow these guidelines to connect the module to a SIM connector implementing SIM presence detection Connect the UICC SIM contacts C1 VCC and C6 VPP to the VSIM pin of the module Connect the UICC SIM contact C7 I O to the SIM_IO pin of the module Connect the UICC SIM contact C3 CLK to the SIM_CLK pin of the module Connect the UICC SIM contact C2 RST to the SIM_RST pin of the module Connect the UICC SIM contact C5 GND to ground Connect one pin of the mechanical switch integrated in the SIM connector e g the SW2 pin as described in Figure 51 to the GPIOS input pin of the module Connect the other pin of the mechanical switch integrated in the SIM connector e g the SW1 pin as
100. PCI L280 02S modules product versions Removed description and design in for TOBY L2xx 50S TOBY L280 00S modules product versions Document status updated to Early Production Information Early Production Information Revision history Page 161 of 162 biox Contact TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual For complete contact information visit us at http Awww u blox com u blox Offices North Central and South America u blox America Inc Phone 1 703 483 3180 E mail info usQu blox com Regional Office West Coast Phone 1 408 573 3640 E mail mailto info usQu blox com Technical Support Phone 1 703 483 3185 E mail mailto support usQu blox com UBX 13004618 R12 Headquarters Europe Middle East Africa u blox AG Phone 41 44 722 74 44 E mail info u blox com Support mailto supportQu blox com Early Production Information Asia Australia Pacific u blox Singapore Pte Ltd Phone 65 6734 3811 E mail info_ap u blox com Support support apQu blox com Regional Office Australia Phone 61 2 8448 2016 E mail info anzQu blox com Support support apQu blox com Regional Office China Beijing Phone 86 10 68 133 545 E mail info cnQu blox com Support support cnQu blox com Regional Office China Chongqing Phone 86 23 6815 1588 E mail info cnQu blox com Support support cnQu blox com Regional Office China Shanghai Phone 86 21 6090 4832 E mail info
101. PERST pin when the VCC or 3 3Vaux module supply voltage stabilizes at its proper nominal value within the normal operating range The status of the PWR_ON input pin of TOBY L2 modules while applying the VCC module supply is not relevant during this phase the PWR_ON pin can be set high or low by the external circuit When the TOBY L2 modules are in the power off mode i e switched off with valid VCC module supply applied they can be switched on as following Low level on the PWR_ON pin which is normally set high by an internal pull up for a valid time period Low level on the RESET_N pin which is normally set high by an internal pull up for a valid time period RTC alarm i e pre programmed alarm by AT CALA command see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 As described in Figure 13 the TOBY L2 series PWR ON input is equipped with an internal active pull up resistor to the VCC module supply the PWR ON input voltage thresholds are different from the other generic digital interfaces Detailed electrical characteristics are described in TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 TOBY L2 series m Power Baseband Management Processor 50k PWR ON ET e Power on gt Power on vcc Figure 13 TOBY L2 series PWR_ON input description UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 31 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Man
102. Q to assure good antenna detection functionality and avoid a reduction of module RF performance The choke inductor should exhibit a parallel Self Resonance Frequency SRF in the range of 1 GHz to improve the RF isolation of load resistor For example Consider an antenna with built in DC load resistor of 15 kQ Using the UANTR AT command the module reports the resistance value evaluated from the antenna connector provided on the application board to GND Reported values close to the used diagnostic resistor nominal value i e values from 13 kQ to 17 kQ if a 15 kQ diagnostic resistor is used indicate that the antenna is properly connected Values close to the measurement range maximum limit approximately 50 kQ or an open circuit over range report see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 means that that the antenna is not connected or the RF cable is broken Reported values below the measurement range minimum limit 1 KQ highlights a short to GND at antenna or along the RF cable Measurement inside the valid measurement range and outside the expected range may indicate an improper connection damaged antenna or wrong value of antenna load resistor for diagnostic Reported value could differ from the real resistance value of the diagnostic resistor mounted inside the antenna assembly due to antenna cable length antenna cable capacity and the used measurement method L If the primary secondary antenna detection function is not required b
103. QR VPP C6 VsiM ER e o o a VCC C1 SIM IO e e IO C7 SIM CLK EA e e CLK C3 SIM RST ER D e RST C2 SIM Card Bottom View X X GND C5 contacts side C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 pal D2 p3 pa ps5 De n Figure 51 Application circuit for the connection to a single removable SIM card with SIM detection implemented Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer C1 C2 C3 CA 47 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 596 50 V GRM1555C1H470JA01 Murata C5 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 1096 16 V GRM155R71C104KA01 Murata D1 D6 Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection PESD0402 140 Tyco Electronics R1 1 kO Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W RC0402JR 071KL Yageo Phycomp R2 470 kQ Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W RC0402JR 07470KL Yageo Phycomp Ji SIM Card Holder 6 2 p with card presence switch Various manufacturers as CCM03 3013LFT R102 C amp K Table 32 Example of components for the connection to a single removable SIM card with SIM detection implemented UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 102 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Guidelines for dual SIM card chip connection Two SIM card chip can be connected to the SIM interface of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules as described in the application circuits of Figure 52 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules do not support the usage of two SIM at the same time but two SIM can be pop
104. R1 R2 R4 R5 4 7 KQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RC0402JR 074K7L Yageo Phycomp R3 47 kQ Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W RC0402JR 0747KL Yageo Phycomp C2 C3 C4 C5 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0402 1096 10V GRM155R71C104KA01 Murata U1 c1 Voltage Regulator for GNSS receiver and capacitor See GNSS receiver Hardware Integration Manual U2 I2C bus Bidirectional Voltage Translator TCA9406DCUR Texas Instruments U3 Generic Unidirectional Voltage Translator SN74AVC2T245 Texas Instruments Table 40 Components for connecting TOBY L2 modules to u blox 3 0 V GNSS receivers For additional guidelines regarding the design of applications with u blox 3 0 V GNSS receivers see the GNSS Implementation Application Note 14 and the Hardware Integration Manual of the u blox GNSS receivers 2 6 3 2 Guidelines for DDC lC layout design The DDC CC serial interface requires the same consideration regarding electro magnetic interference as any other digital interface Keep the traces short and avoid coupling with RF line or sensitive analog inputs since the signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 115 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 6 4 Secure Digital Input Output interface SDIO L The SDIO Secure Digital Input Output interface is not available on MPCI L2 series modules 2 6 4 1 Guidelines for SDIO circuit design
105. S is a widespread technology its reliance on the visibility of extremely weak GNSS satellite signals means that positioning is not always possible Especially difficult environments for GNSS are indoors in enclosed or underground parking garages as well as in urban canyons where GNSS signals are blocked or jammed by multipath interference The situation can be improved by augmenting GNSS receiver data with cellular network information to provide positioning information even when GNSS reception is degraded or absent This additional information can benefit numerous applications UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 62 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Positioning through cellular information CellLocate u blox CellLocate enables the estimation of device position based on the parameters of the mobile network cells visible to the specific device To estimate its position the u blox cellular module sends the CellLocate server the parameters of network cells visible to it using a UDP connection In return the server provides the estimated position based on the CellLocate database The u blox cellular module can either send the parameters of the visible home network cells only normal scan or the parameters of all surrounding cells of all mobile operators deep scan The CellLocate database is compiled from the position of devices which observed in the past a specific c
106. SB D USB D lines carry the USB serial bus data and signaling providing all the functionalities for the bus attachment configuration enumeration suspension or remote wakeup according to the Universal Serial Bus Revision 2 0 specification 7 The additional VUSB DET input is available as an optional feature to sense the host VBUS voltage 5 0 V typical L The VUSB DET functionality is not supported by TOBY L2 00 01 02 and 60 product versions the pin should be left unconnected or it should not be driven high by any external device because a high logic level applied to the pin will represent a module switch on event additional to the ones listed in section 1 6 1 and will prevent reaching the minimum possible consumption with power saving enabled LS The VUSB_DET pin is not available on MPCI L2 series modules The USB interface is controlled and operated with AT commands according to 3GPP TS 27 007 9 3GPP TS 27 005 10 3GPP TS 27 010 11 u blox AT commands L For the complete list of supported AT commands and their syntax see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 40 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 modules provide by default the following USB profile with the listed set of USB functions 1 RNDIS for Ethernet over USB connection 1 CDC ACM for AT commands and data communication The USB pr
107. Solder Mask Defined NSMD pad type is recommended over the Solder Mask Defined SMD pad type implementing the solder mask opening 50 um larger per side than the corresponding copper pad The suggested paste mask layout for TOBY L2 series modules slightly reflects the copper mask layout described in Figure 71 and Table 46 as different stencil apertures layout for any specific pad is recommended e Blue marked pads Paste layout reduced circumferentially about 0 025 mm to Copper layout e Green marked pads Paste layout enlarged circumferentially about 0 025 mm to Copper layout e Purple marked pads Paste layout one to one to Copper layout The recommended solder paste thickness is 150 um according to application production process requirements L These are recommendations only and not specifications The exact mask geometries distances and stencil thicknesses must be adapted to the specific production processes e g soldering etc of the customer UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 126 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 13 MPCI L2 series module installation MPCI L2 series modules are fully compliant with the 52 pin PCI Express Full Mini Card Type F2 form factor i e top side and bottom side keep out areas 50 95 mm nominal length 30 mm nominal width and all the other dimensions as defined by the PCI Express Mini Card Electromechanical Specification 16 except for
108. TOBY L2 00 01 02 and 60 product versions TOBY L2 series modules include two input pins HOST SELECTO and HOST SELECT for the selection of the module configuration by the host application processor UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 35 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 7 Antenna interface 1 7 1 Antenna RF interfaces ANT1 ANT2 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules provide two RF interfaces for connecting the external antennas The ANT1 represents the primary RF input output for transmission and reception of LTE 3G 2G RF signals The ANT1 pin of TOBY L2 series modules has a nominal characteristic impedance of 50 Q and must be connected to the primary Tx Rx antenna through a 50 Q transmission line to allow proper RF transmission and reception The ANT1 Hirose U FL R SMT coaxial connector receptacle of MPCI L2 series modules has a nominal characteristic impedance of 50 Q and must be connected to the primary Tx Rx antenna through a mated RF plug with a 50 Q coaxial cable assembly to allow proper RF transmission and reception The ANT2 represents the secondary RF input for the reception of the LTE RF signals for the Down Link MIMO 2 x 2 radio technology supported by TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules as required feature for LTE category 4 UEs and for the reception of the 3G RF signals for the Down Link Rx diversity radio technology supported by TOBY L2 a
109. TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series LTE DC HSPA EGPRS modules System Integration Manual Abstract This document describes the features and the system integration of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series multi mode cellular modules These modules are a complete and cost efficient LTE 3G 2G solution offering up to 150 Mb s download and 50 Mb s upload data rates covering up to six LTE bands up to five WCDMA DC HSPA bands and four GSM EGPRS bands in the compact TOBY LGA form factor of TOBY L2 modules or in the industry standard PCI Express Mini Card form factor of MPCI L2 modules www u blox com UBX 13004618 R12 pue TOBY L2 series n at t T W MPCI L2 series blox ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Document Information Title TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series Subtitle LTE DC HSPA EGPRS modules Document type System Integration Manual Document number UBX 13004618 Revision and date R12 26 Nov 2015 Document status Early Production Information Document status explanation Objective Specification Document contains target values Revised and supplementary data will be published later Advance Information Document contains data based on early testing Revised and supplementary data will be published later Early Production Information Document contains data from product verification Revised and supplementary data may be published later Production Information Document contains the fi
110. The additional VUSB DET input is available as optional feature to sense the host VBUS voltage 5 0 V typical L VUSB_DET functionality is not supported by TOBY L2 modules 00 01 02 60 product versions the pin should be left unconnected or it should not be driven high for more details see section 1 9 1 1 L VUSB_DET pin is not available on MPCI L2 series modules Routing the USB pins to a connector they will be externally accessible on the application device According to EMC ESD requirements of the application an additional ESD protection device with very low capacitance should be provided close to accessible point on the line connected to this pin as described in Figure 53 and Table 34 L The USB interface pins ESD sensitivity rating is 1 kV Human Body Model according to JESD22 A114F Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting a very low capacitance i e less or equal to 1 pF ESD protection e g Tyco Electronics PESD0402 140 ESD protection device on the lines connected to these pins close to accessible points The USB Dr and USB D pins of the modules can be directly connected to the USB host application processor without additional ESD protections if they are not externally accessible or according to EMC ESD requirements USB DEVICE USB HOST i CONNECTOR TOBY L2
111. UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Appendix Page 153 of 162 biox Table 50 summarizes the interfaces provided TOBY L2 series modules make available additional interfaces over pins remarked as reserved on TOBY L1 series modules highlighted in blue in Figure 82 Module TOBY L100 TOBY L200 TOBY L201 TOBY L210 TOBY L220 TOBY L280 LTE category w A 4 RF Radio Access Technology LTE bands 4 13 2 4 5 7 17 2 4 5 E 7 1 3 5 7 8 20 USR 8 19 1 3 5 7 8 28 HSDPA category 24 24 24 24 HSUPA category 6 3G bands 1 2 4 e supported by all product versions o supported by all product versions except version 00 T g i ka ei x ET ac LLI ec N a 84 S So v O N 2 e 12 Quad e e 12 Quad e e 12 Quad Antenna Detection TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Power i E 2 Si o Ki gt amp 2 ocg v 5 gt Kei co Qu E x Un Z O ffe gt gt gt e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e System SIM Serial Audio GPIO m v D gt gt E 2 2 E D E e Hi gt GF m 5 0 2 5 gt E er B A EPES z z2 A g Igar Lx H 5 g si EES EE he 2 oje SA Im LO A E uU ou oc O ul SO BAA zon8zzanaosSor amp tvc5zz amp c Co o 23 D o Ost Ou Z O O e e e e F e e er eoo e o oo e F F exce F gt F gt o F F PP Oli iF e e F e m o e m m mE gm e F F e e F e o oe oe
112. Vaux pins with a proper DC power supply that should meet the following prerequisites to comply with the modules VCC or 3 3Vaux requirements summarized in Table 7 The proper DC power supply can be selected according to the application requirements see Figure 31 between the different possible supply sources types which most common ones are the following e Switching regulator e Low Drop Out LDO linear regulator e Rechargeable Lithium ion Li lon or Lithium ion polymer Li Pol battery for TOBY L2 series only e Primary disposable battery for TOBY L2 series only Main Supply No portable device Available Battery Li lon 3 7 V Yes always available Linear LDO Regulator Main Supply No less than 5 V Voltage gt 5V Yes greater than 5 V Switching Step Down Regulator Figure 31 VCC supply concept selection The switching step down regulator is the typical choice when the available primary supply source has a nominal voltage much higher e g greater than 5 V than the operating supply voltage of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series The use of switching step down provides the best power efficiency for the overall application and minimizes current drawn from the main supply source See 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 6 2 2 1 9 2 2 1 10 for specific design in The use of an LDO linear regulator becomes convenient for a primary supply with a relatively low voltage e g less or equal than 5 V In this case the typical 9096
113. Y L2 module 02 product versions Figure 77 is an example of a schematic diagram where a TOBY L2 cellular module 02 product version is integrated into an application board using all the available interfaces and functions of the module TOBY L2 module 02 version 3V8 Wa vcc vcc VCC Tao 100nF 1OnF 68pF 15pF 8 20 cu E ere RTC back up Tigoyr r EE c Application Processor Open drain Open drain IP ER rwr on output TP EB RESET_N output USB 2 0 host H VBUS EB vos o i i 00 TP H D USB_D H 0a TP i D USB_D H GND Se E cu TXD RXD RTS cTs DTR DSR RI DCD GND E Host seLecTo HOST_SELECT1 GPIO2 3V8 GPIO3 Network i E Indicator w J E crios A rsv EB vun ANT1 ANT2 ANT_DET V_INT GPIO5 VSIM SIM IO SIM CLK SIM RST SDA SCL DS TXD DS RXD DS CLK DS WA GPIO6 SDIO DO SDIO D1 SDIO D2 SDIO D3 SDIO CLK SDIO CMD GPIO1 GND 4 5 Primary 33pF Connector Cellular EN fe Antenna 82nH E vi Secondary 33pF Connector Cell
114. a set ready output UART data terminal ready input UART data carrier detect output UART ring indicator output Input to sense high or low digital level Output to set the high or the low digital level Tri state with an internal active pull down enabled Table 13 TOBY L2 series GPIO custom functions configuration Support planned for future product versions UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Default GPIO I2S_RXD I2S TXD I2S_CLK US WA GPIO6 GPIO1 DSR DTR DCD RI GPIO4 GPIO2 GPIO3 Configurable GPIOs All All All GPIO5 GPIO5 I2S_RXD I2S TXD I2S_CLK DS WA GPIO6 All GPIO3 DTR GPIO3 DCD GPIO2 RI GPIO6 I2S_RXD I2S TXD I2S_CLK DS WA DSR DTR DCD RI DSR DTR DCD RI All All All System description Page 58 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 12 Mini PCle specific signals W_DISABLE LED_WWAN L Mini PCI Express specific signals W_DISABLE LED WWAND are not available on TOBY L2 series MPCI L2 series modules include the W_DISABLE active low input signal to disable the radio operations as specified by the PCI Express Mini Card Electromechanical Specification 16 As described in Figure 27 the W DISABLE input is equipped with an internal pull up to the 3 3Vaux supply The W_DISABLE input detailed electrical characteristics are described in the MPCI L2 series Data Sheet 2 MPCI L2 series B
115. ace application circuit with complete V 24 link in DTE DCE serial communication 1 8V DTE If a 3 0 V Application Processor DTE is used then it is recommended to connect the 1 8 V UART interface of the module DCE by means of appropriate unidirectional voltage translators using the module V INT output as 1 8 V supply for the voltage translators on the module side as described in Figure 57 Application Processor TOBY L2 series Unidirectional 3 0V DTE 3vo Voltage Translator 1V8 1 8V DCE vcc VCCA VCCB E V_INT Te TI DIR1 DIR3 od TxD Ai DU To RxD e a 82 22 elt RXD RTS a3 B3 g gt RTS cts e a B4 crs DIR2 OE ess GND in Unidirectional 3V0 Voltage Translator 1V8 VCCA VCCB c3 Ea T DIRI Se DTR Al 81 DTR DSR e a B2 22 gf DSR RI ein 83 g2 RI pep la B4 ZS e DCD DIR2 DIR3 OE GND DIRA GND GND u2 Figure 57 UART interface application circuit with complete V 24 link in DTE DCE serial communication 3 0 V DTE Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer EL C2 C3 C4 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10 16 V GRM155R61A104KA01 Murata U1 U2 Unidirectional Voltage Translator SN74AVCAT774 Texas Instruments Table 35 Component for UART application circuit with complete V 24 link in DTE DCE serial communication 3 0 V DTE Voltage translator providing partial power d
116. acitors in particular if the application device integrates an internal antenna Do not apply loads which might exceed the limit for maximum available current from V INT supply Check that voltage level of any connected pin does not exceed the relative operating range Check USB D USB D signal lines as well as very low capacitance ESD protections if accessible Capacitance and series resistance must be limited on each SIM signal to match the SIM specifications Insert the suggested capacitors on each SIM signal and low capacitance ESD protections if accessible Check UART signals direction as the TOBY L2 signal names follow the ITU T V 24 Recommendation 8 Consider providing appropriate low value series damping resistors on SDIO lines to avoid reflections Add a proper pull up resistor e g 4 7 KQ to V INT or another proper 1 8 V supply on each DDC CC interface line if the interface is used Check the digital audio interface specifications to connect a proper external audio device Consider passive filtering parts on each used analog audio line Provide accessible test points directly connected to the following pins of the TOBY L2 series modules V INT PWR ON and RESET N for diagnostic purpose Provide accessible test points directly connected to all the UART pins of the TOBY L2 series modules TXD RXD RTS CTS DTR DSR DCD RI for diagnostic purpose in particular providing a OO series jumper on each line to detach each UART pin
117. ample the USB profile configuration can be changed by means of the AT UUSBCONF command switching to a USB profile configuration which provides the following 4 functions 1 CDC ECM for Ethernet over USB 3 CDC ACM for AT commands and data In case of this USB profile with the set of 4 functions described above the VID and PID are the following VID 0x1546 PID 0x1143 The switch of the active USB profile selected by the AT UUSBCONF command is not performed immediately The settings are saved in the non volatile memory of the module at the power off and the new configuration is effective at the subsequent reboot of the module If the USB is connected to the host before the module is switched on or if the module is reset rebooted with the USB connected to the host the VID and PID are automatically updated during the boot of the module First VID and PID are the following VID 0x1546 PID 0x1140 This VID and PID combination identifies a USB profile where no USB function described above is available AT commands must not be sent to the module over the USB profile identified by this VID and PID combination Then after a time period roughly 20 s depending on the host device enumeration timings the VID and PID are updated to the ones related to the USB profile selected by the AT UUSBCONF command L For more details regarding the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules USB configurations and capabilities see the u blox AT Commands Man
118. antennas The ANT1 pin represents the primary RF input output for LTE 3G 2G RF signals transmission and reception The ANT2 pin represents the secondary RF input for LTE MIMO 2 x 2 or 3G Rx diversity RF signals reception Both the ANT1 and the ANT2 pins have a nominal characteristic impedance of 50 Q and must be connected to the related antenna through a 50 Q transmission line to allow proper transmission reception of RF signals L Two antennas one connected to ANT1 pin and one connected to ANT2 pin must be used to support the Down Link MIMO 2 x 2 radio technology This is a required feature for LTE category 4 User Equipments up to 150 Mb s Down Link data rate according to 3GPP specifications 2 4 1 Antenna RF interfaces ANT1 ANT2 2 4 1 1 General guidelines for antenna selection and design The antenna is the most critical component to be evaluated Designers must take care of the antennas from all perspective at the very start of the design phase when the physical dimensions of the application board are under analysis decision since the RF compliance of the device integrating TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules with all the applicable required certification schemes depends on antennas radiating performance LTE 3G 2G antennas are typically available in the types of linear monopole or PCB antennas such as patches or ceramic SMT elements External antennas e g linear monopole o External antennas basically do not imply physical res
119. anual 3 Wake up via data reception The UART wake up via data reception consists of a special configuration of the module TXD input line that causes the system wake up when a low to high transition occurs on the TXD input line In particular the UART is enabled and the module switches from the low power idle mode to active mode within 5 ms from the first character received this is the system wake up time As a consequence the first character sent by the DTE when the UART is disabled i e the wake up character is not a valid communication character even if the wake up via data reception configuration is active because it cannot be recognized and the recognition of the subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the complete system wake up i e after 5 ms The TXD input line is configured to wake up the system via data reception in the following cases AT UPSV 1 is set with HW flow control disabled AT UPSV 2 is set with HW flow control disabled and the RTS line is set OFF AT UPSV 3 is set with HW flow control disabled and the DTR line is set OFF Figure 24 and Figure 25 show examples of common scenarios and timing constraints AT UPSV 1 power saving configuration is active and the timeout from last data received to idle mode start is set to 2000 frames AT UPSV 1 2000 Hardware flow control is disabled Figure 24 shows the case where the module UART is disabled and only a wake up is forced In this scenario the only characte
120. aseband 3 3Vaux MN Processor 22k W DISABLE E e gt W_DISABLE Figure 27 MPCI L2 series modules W DISABLE input circuit description MPCI L2 series modules include the LED_WWAN active low open drain output to provide the Wireless Wide Area Network status indication as specified by the PCI Express Mini Card Electromechanical Specification 16 Le For more electrical characteristics details see the MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 1 13 Reserved pins RSVD Le Pins reserved for future use marked as RSVD are not available on MPCI L2 series TOBY L2 series modules have pins reserved for future use marked as RSVD they can all be left unconnected on the application board except the RSVD pin number 6 that must be externally connected to ground 1 14 Not connected pins NC L Pins internally not connected marked as NC are not available on TOBY L2 series MPCI L2 series modules have pins internally not connected marked as NC they can be left unconnected or they can be connected on the application board according to any application requirement given that none function is provided by the modules over these pins System description Page 59 of 162 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 15 System features 1 15 1 Network indication L Network status indication over GPIO1 is not available on
121. ation or using freeware tools like AppCAD from Agilent www agilent com or TXLine from Applied Wave Research www mwoffice com taking care of the approximation formulas used by the tools for the impedance computation To achieve a 50 Q characteristic impedance the width of the transmission line must be chosen depending on e the thickness of the transmission line itself e g 35 um in the example of Figure 45 and Figure 46 e the thickness of the dielectric material between the top layer where the transmission line is routed and the inner closer layer implementing the ground plane e g 270 um in Figure 45 1510 um in Figure 46 e the dielectric constant of the dielectric material e g dielectric constant of the FR 4 dielectric material in Figure 45 and Figure 46 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 92 of 162 Qo OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual e the gap from the transmission line to the adjacent ground plane on the same layer of the transmission line e g 500 um in Figure 45 400 um in Figure 46 If the distance between the transmission line and the adjacent GND area on the same layer does not exceed 5 times the track width of the micro strip use the Coplanar Waveguide model for the 50 Q calculation Additionally to the 50 Q impedance the following guidelines are recommended for transmission lines design e Minimize the transmission line length the insertion loss should
122. ation board design L The necessity of each part depends on the specific design but it is recommended to provide all the bypass capacitors described in Figure 36 Table 19 if the application device integrates an internal antenna UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 77 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual TOBY L2 series vcc vcc e e e e e e vcc GND WO MPCI L2 series 3V3 3 3Vaux d 3 3Vaux e e e e 3 3Vaux 3 3Vaux 3 3Vaux C2 3 CA C5 C6 GND Figure 36 Suggested schematic for the VCC 3 3Vaux bypass capacitors to reduce ripple noise on supply voltage profile Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer C1 68 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 596 50 V GRM1555C1H680JA01 Murata C2 15 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 5 50 V GRM1555C1H150JA01 Murata C3 8 2 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 596 50 V GRM1555C1H8R2DZ01 Murata C4 10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 1096 16 V GRM155R71C103KA01 Murata C5 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 1096 16 V GRM155R71C104KA01 Murata C6 330 uF Capacitor Tantalum D SIZE 6 3 V 45 mQ T520D337MO006ATEO045 KEMET Table 19 Suggested components to reduce ripple noise on VCC 3 3Vaux L ESD sensitivity rating of the VCC 3 3Vaux supply pins is 1 kV HBM according to JESD22 A114 Higher protection level can be required if the li
123. ative vertical market of the device on type features and functionalities of the whole application device and on the network operators where the device must operate L The certification of the application device that integrates a TOBY L2 module and the compliance of the application device with all the applicable certification schemes directives and standards are the sole responsibility of the application device manufacturer TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules are certified according to all capabilities and options stated in the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement document PICS of the module The PICS according to the 3GPP TS 51 010 2 27 3GPP TS 34 121 2 28 3GPP TS 36 521 2 30 and 3GPP TS 36 523 2 31 is a statement of the implemented and supported capabilities and options of a device L The PICS document of the application device integrating TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules must be updated from the module PICS statement if any feature stated as supported by the module in its PICS document is not implemented or disabled in the application device For more details regarding the AT commands settings that affect the PICS see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 L Check the specific settings required for mobile network operators approvals as they may differ from the AT commands settings defined in the module as integrated in the application device UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Approvals Page 143 of 16
124. ature This improves the device long term reliability in particular for applications operating at high ambient temperature Recommended hardware techniques to be used to improve heat dissipation in the application Connect each GND pin with solid ground layer of the application board and connect each ground area of the multilayer application board with complete thermal via stacked down to main ground layer Use the two mounting holes described in Figure 72 to fix ground the MPCI L2 modules to the main ground of the application board with suitable screws and fasteners Provide a ground plane as wide as possible on the application board Optimize antenna return loss to optimize overall electrical performance of the module including a decrease of module thermal power Optimize the thermal design of any high power components included in the application such as linear regulators and amplifiers to optimize overall temperature distribution in the application device Select the material the thickness and the surface of the box i e the mechanical enclosure of the application device that integrates the module so that it provides good thermal dissipation Follow the thermal guidelines for integrating wireless wide area network mini card add in cards such as the MPCI L2 series modules as provided in the PCI Express Mini Card Electromechanical Specification 16 Further hardware techniques that may be considered to improve the heat dissipation
125. band according to 3GPP TS 36 521 1 29 HSDPA category 24 capable gt GPRS EDGE multi slot class determines the number of timeslots available for upload and download and thus the speed at which data can be transmitted and received with higher classes typically allowing faster data transfer rates GPRS EDGE multi slot class 12 implies a maximum of 4 slots in DL reception and 4 slots in UL transmission with 5 slots in total UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 10 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 2 Architecture Figure 1 summarizes the internal architecture of TOBY L2 series modules ANT DET PAs Filters 4 A Duplexer Ux Ee 26 MHz SIM EN LNAs Filters 4 ER uw DDC PO eg lt lt PAs Filters Te e RS gt RE SDIO e LNAs Filters i Fites gt gt gt Be gt Transceiver Memory lt La NL x Cellular qs Filters LNAs Filters Base band H es hea PEE Processor ar 32 768 kHz Digital audio 12S Filters LNAs Filters UBS D gt gt P i Host Select VCC Supply i Power On BEE RTO Power Management Unit 4 T i e ECHEMACLER M bici E V INT O Figure 1 TOBY L2 series block diagram As described in the Figure 2 each MPCI L2 series mo
126. bile routers and gateways and applications requiring video streaming They are also optimally suited for industrial M2M applications such as remote access to video cameras digital signage telehealth and security and surveillance systems MPCI L2 modules are designed in the industry standard PCI Express Full Mini Card form factor 51 x 30 mm easy to integrate into industrial and consumer applications and also ideal for manufacturing of small series Typical applications are industrial computing ruggedized terminals video communications wireless routers alarm panels and surveillance digital signage and payment systems With LTE Category 4 data rates at up to 150 Mb s down link and 50 Mb s up link the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules are ideal for applications requiring the highest data rates and high speed internet access UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 8 of 162 biox Table 1 summarizes the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series main features and interfaces Module TOBY L200 TOBY L201 TOBY L210 TOBY L220 TOBY L280 MPCI L200 MPCI L210 MPCI L280 LTE FDD category A 4 4 LTE Bands 2 4 5 T 2 4 5 13 17 1 3 5 7 8 20 1 3 5 19 1 Las 7 8 28 2 4 5 7 17 1 35 7 8 20 1 3 5 7 8 28 HSDPA category N DA 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 UMTS e o en I9 g a 5 I ea 850 900 6 AWS 1900 2100 6 850 1900 6 850 900 1900
127. bled AT amp K3 that is the default setting the pin can be connected using a O Q series resistor to GND or to the active module CTS low electrical level when the module is in active mode the UART interface is enabled and the HW flow control is enabled Connect the module DTR input line to GND using a 0 Q series resistor as the module requires DTR active Leave DSR DCD and RI lines of the module unconnected and floating If RS 232 compatible signal levels are needed the Maxim 13234E voltage level translator can be used This chip translates voltage levels from 1 8 V module side to the RS 232 standard If a 1 8 V Application Processor DTE is used the circuit that should be implemented as described in Figure 60 TOBY L2 series 1 8V DCE Application Processor 1 8V DTE TXD RXD RTS CTS DTR DSR RI DCD GND DTR DSR RI DCD GND oa au ttt Figure 60 UART interface application circuit with partial V 24 link 3 wire in the DTE DCE serial communication 1 8V DTE If a 3 0 V Application Processor DTE is used then it is recommended to connect the 1 8 V UART interface of the module DCE by means of appropriate unidirectional voltage translators using the module V_INT output as 1 8 V supply for the voltage translators on the module side as described in Figure 61 Application Processor TOBY L2 series 3 0V DTE Unidirectional 1 8V DCE 3V0 Voltage Translator
128. cation requirements as the actual electrical characteristics of the battery and the external supply charging source proper resistors or capacitors have to be accordingly connected to the related pins of the IC Li lon Li Polymer Battery Charger Regulator with Power Path Managment BST TOBY L2 series _ c4 L1 Primary VIN SYS e e ee ee e o vcc Source VCC eg cs Li lon Li Po VLIM d Battery Pack R5 ES BAT _ _ _ e K i EN D R1 SS ILIM NTC 1 i C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 ISET vcCc e 8 R3 CR e TMR X GND C3 C6 C7 C8 C9 Tp4Tpo gi C1 C2 AGND PGND E D ser Gs ee U 1 Figure 39 Li lon or Li Polymer battery charging and power path management application circuit Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer B1 Li lon or Li Polymer battery pack with 10 kQ NTC Various manufacturer C1 C5 C6 22 yF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 1210 1096 25 V GRM32ER61E226KE15 Murata C2 C4 C11 00 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 1096 16 V GRM155R61A104KA01 Murata C3 UF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0603 10 25 V GRM188R71E105KA12 Murata C7 C13 68 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 596 50 V GRM1555C1H680JA01 Murata C8 C14 5 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 596 25 V GRM1
129. ce classification as defined by ETSI EN 301 489 1 24 Applicability of ESD immunity test to the relative device ports or the relative interconnecting cables to auxiliary equipment depends on device accessible interfaces and manufacturer requirements as defined by ETSI EN 301 489 1 24 Contact discharges are performed at conductive surfaces while air discharges are performed at insulating surfaces Indirect contact discharges are performed on the measurement setup horizontal and vertical coupling planes as defined in CENELEC EN 61000 4 2 23 L For the definition of integral antenna removable antenna antenna port and device classification see ETSI EN 301 489 1 24 For the contact air discharges definitions see CENELEC EN 61000 4 2 23 Application Category Immunity Level All exposed surfaces of the radio equipment and ancillary equipment ina Contact Discharge 4 kV representative configuration ner Air Discharge 8kV Table 48 EMC ESD immunity requirements as defined by CENELEC EN 61000 4 2 and ETSI EN 301 489 1 301 489 7 301 489 24 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 130 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 15 2 ESD immunity test of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series reference designs Although EMC ESD certification is required for customized devices integrating TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules for R amp TTED and European Conformance CE mark EMC certification i
130. ch as CDC ACM for AT commands and data CDC ACM for GNSS tunneling CDC ACM for SIM Access Profile SAP CDC ACM for diagnostic RNDIS for Ethernet over USB CDC ECM for Ethernet over USB CDC NCM for Ethernet over USB MBIM for Ethernet over USB L CDC ACM for GNSS tunneling and for SIM Access Profile SAP are not supported by MPCI L2 modules L CDC ACM for GNSS tunneling CDC ACM for SIM Access Profile SAP CDC NCM and MBIM functions are not supported by 00 01 02 and 60 product versions UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 41 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual For example the default USB profile configuration which provides 2 functions 1 RNDIS for Ethernet over USB and 1 CDC ACM for AT commands and data can be changed by means of the AT UUSBCONF command switching to a USB profile configuration which provides the following 6 functions 3 CDC ACM for AT commands and data 1 CDC ACM for GNSS tunneling 1 CDC ACM for SIM Access Profile SAP 1 CDC ACM for diagnostic As each USB profile of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 modules identifies itself by its specific VID and PID combination included in the USB device descriptor according to the USB 2 0 specifications 7 the VID and PID combination changes as following by switching the active USB profile configuration to the set of 6 functions described above VID 0x1546 PID 0x1141 Alternatively as another ex
131. channels are defined for more details see Mux implementation Application Note 12 Channel 0 control channel Channel 1 5 AT commands data connection Channel 6 GNSS tunneling not supported by 00 01 02 and 60 product versions Channel 7 SIM Access Profile SAP not supported by 00 01 02 and 60 product versions See the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 for the definition of the interface data mode command mode and online command mode UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 54 of 162 4 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 9 3 DDC I C interface The l C bus compatible Display Data Channel interface is not available on the MPCI L2 series modules 4 4 The FC bus compatible Display Data Channel interface is not supported by the TOBY L2 series modules 00 01 and 60 product versions Communication with u blox GNSS receivers over l C bus compatible Display Data Channel interface AssistNow embedded GNSS positioning aiding CellLocate positioning through cellular info and custom functions over GPIOs for the integration with u blox positioning chips modules are not supported by TOBY L2 series modules 02 product version The SDA and SCL pins of TOBY L2 series modules represent an l C bus compatible Display Data Channel DDC interface for the communication with u blox GNSS receivers and with other external UC devices as audio codecs a
132. chematic for TOBY L1 and TOBY L2 integration Figure 85 shows an example schematic diagram where a TOBY L1 series module or a TOBY L2 series module 00 01 02 or 60 product versions can be integrated into the same application board using all the available interfaces and functions of the module The different mounting options for the external parts are highlighted in different colors as described in the legend according to the interfaces supported by the different module product versions TOBY L1 series 00 01 product versions TOBY L100 xx a 8 y n4 pr EN H TOBY L2xx 00 TOBY L2 series CO 01 02 60 versions P voe erri T ei 7 nw am 33pr E TOBY L2xx 60 Connector Cellular vec ANT KING 3 Antenna vec 82nH Z lt b Seconda le vec 33pr Connector y Cellular 330uF 100nF 10nF 68pF 15pF 8 2pF GND ANT2 EJ Antenna 82nH 10k V_BCKP RSVD ANT DET 3 3 a RTC back up 777 VINT ack up haut MEE c INT d as SIM Card Holder en ES V_INT swi Application coe MAS Processor 100k VSIM CCvcc C1 PWR ON Open CCVPP C6 Drain Output SIM IO CCIO C7 e TP SIM CLK CCCLK C3 Open RESETEN SIM RST CCRST C2 Gita J GND C5 agok 47PF 47pF 47pF 47pF 100nF Esp esp esp ESD
133. circuit des ve data input alternatively configurable ions 2 7 and 2 8 for external circuit des ions 1 10 and 1 11 for functional descri ions 1 10 and 1 11 for functional descri ions 2 7 and 2 8 for external circuit desi ions 2 7 and 2 8 for external circuit desi ported by 00 01 60 product versions Wi Fi chip ported by 00 01 60 product versions Wi Fi chip ported by 00 01 60 product versions Wi Fi chip ported by 00 01 60 product versions Wi Fi chip ported by 00 01 60 product versions Wi Fi chip ported by 00 01 60 product versions Wi Fi chip ported by 00 01 60 product versions S transmit data output alternatively configurable as GPIO ions 1 10 and 1 11 for functional description ign in ported by 00 01 60 product versions as GPIO ions 1 10 and 1 11 for functional description ign in ported by 00 01 60 product versions clock alternatively configurable as GPIO ption gn in ported by 00 01 60 product versions alignment alternatively configurable as GPIO ption gn in System description Page 16 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Function Pin Name Pin No UO Description Remarks GPIO GPIO1 21 VO GPIO Not supported by 00 01 60 product versions providing WWAN status indication on GPIO1 pin 1 8 V GPIO with alternat
134. cription with power saving enabled and USB suspended or with power saving disabled and USB not suspended see the sections 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 6 and the TOBY L2 Data Sheet 1 or the MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 43 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 9 2 Asynchronous serial interface UART L The UART interface is not available on MPCI L2 series modules L The UART interface is not supported by TOBY L2 series modules 00 product versions 1 9 2 1 UART features The UART interface is a 9 wire 1 8 V unbalanced asynchronous serial interface UART that can be connected to an application host processor for AT commands and data communication The module firmware can be upgraded over the UART interface by means of the Firmware upgrade over AT FOAT feature only for more details see section 1 15 and Firmware Update Application Note 6 UART interface provides RS 232 functionality conforming to the ITU T V 24 Recommendation 8 with CMOS compatible signal levels O V for low data bit or ON state and 1 8 V for high data bit or OFF state for detailed electrical characteristics see TOBY L2 Data Sheet 1 providing data lines RXD as output TXD as input hardware flow control lines CTS as output RTS as input modem status and control lines DTR as input DSR as output DCD as output RI as output TOBY L2 modules are designed to o
135. cteristic impedance is as close as possible to 50 Q RF transmission lines can be designed as a micro strip consists of a conducting strip separated from a ground plane by a dielectric material or a strip line consists of a flat strip of metal which is sandwiched between two parallel ground planes within a dielectric material The micro strip implemented as a coplanar waveguide is the most common configuration for printed circuit board Figure 45 and Figure 46 provide two examples of proper 50 Q coplanar waveguide designs The first example of RF transmission line can be implemented in case of 4 layer PCB stack up herein described and the second example of RF transmission line can be implemented in case of 2 layer PCB stack up herein described 500um 280 um 500pm L1 Copper 35 um FR 4 dielectric 270 um L2 Copper 35 um FR 4 dielectric 760 um L3 Copper 35 um FR 4 dielectric 270 um L4 Copper 4 35 um Figure 45 Example of 50 Q coplanar waveguide transmission line design for the described 4 layer board layup 400 um 1200 um 400 um E L1 Copper 35 um FR 4 dielectric 1510 um L2 Copper 35 um Figure 46 Example of 50 Q coplanar waveguide transmission line design for the described 2 layer board layup If the two examples do not match the application PCB stack up the 50 Q characteristic impedance calculation can be made using the HFSS commercial finite element method solver for electromagnetic structures from Ansys Corpor
136. ction from battery to the module with a low series internal ON resistance 40 mQ typical in order to supplement additional power to the module when the current demand increases over the external main primary source or when this external source is removed UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 80 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Battery charging is managed in three phases Pre charge constant current active when the battery is deeply discharged the battery is charged with a low current set to 10 of the fast charge current Fast charge constant current the battery is charged with the maximum current configured by the value of an external resistor to a value suitable for the application Constant voltage when the battery voltage reaches the regulated output voltage 4 2 V the current is progressively reduced until the charge termination is done The charging process ends when the charging current reaches the 10 of the fast charge current or when the charging timer reaches the value configured by an external capacitor Using a battery pack with an internal NTC resistor the MP2617 can monitor the battery temperature to protect the battery from operating under unsafe thermal conditions Several parameters as the charging current the charging timings the input current limit the input voltage limit the system output voltage can be easily set according to the specific appli
137. d according to the USB 2 0 specification 7 In suspended state the module maintains any USB internal status as device In addition the module enters the suspended state when the hub port it is attached to is disabled This is referred to as USB selective suspend If the USB is suspended and a power saving configuration is enabled by the AT UPSV command the module automatically enters the low power idle mode whenever possible but it wakes up to active mode according to any required activity related to the network e g the periodic paging reception described in section 1 5 1 5 or any other required activity related to the functions interfaces of the module The USB exits suspend mode when there is bus activity If the USB is connected and not suspended the module is forced to stay in active mode therefore the AT UPSV settings are overruled but they have effect on the power saving configuration of the other interfaces The modules are capable of USB remote wake up signaling i e it may request the host to exit suspend mode or selective suspend by using electrical signaling to indicate remote wake up for example due to incoming call URCS data reception on a socket The remote wake up signaling notifies the host that it should resume from its suspended mode if necessary and service the external event Remote wake up is accomplished using electrical signaling described in the USB 2 0 specifications 7 For the module current consumption des
138. d by Electro Magnetic Interference or employ countermeasures to avoid any possible Electro Magnetic Compatibility issue Provide enough clearance between the module and any external part L The heat dissipation during continuous transmission at maximum power can significantly raise the temperature of the application base board below the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules avoid placing temperature sensitive devices close to the module UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 125 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 12 TOBY L2 series module footprint and paste mask Figure 71 and Table 46 describe the suggested footprint i e copper mask layout for TOBY L2 series modules The proposed land pattern layout slightly reflects the modules pads layout with most of the lateral pads designed wider on the application board 1 8 x 0 8 mm than on the module 1 5 x 0 8 mm M2 M1 Mi M3 EN EH EH EH EH EN EH EH EH Eee See Figure 71 TOBY L2 series module suggest footprint application board top view Parameter Value Parameter Value Parameter Value A 35 6 mm H 0 80 mm M2 5 20 mm B 24 8 mm I1 1 50 mm M3 4 50 mm D 2 40 mm I2 1 80 mm N 2 10 mm E 2 25 mm J 0 30 mm O 1 10 mm F1 1 45 mm K 3 15 mm P1 1 10 mm F2 1 30 mm L 7 15 mm P2 1 25 mm G 1 10 mm M1 1 80 mm P3 2 85 mm Table 46 TOBY L2 series module suggest footprint dimensions The Non
139. d configured by a dedicated AT USTS command See the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 for more details The cellular module measures the internal temperature Ti and its value is compared with predefined thresholds to identify the actual working temperature range L Temperature measurement is done inside the cellular module the measured value could be different from the environmental temperature Ta Valid temperature range Dangerous Warning Safe Warning Dangerous area area area area area ty ty ty tha Figure 29 Temperature range and limits The entire temperature range is divided into sub regions by limits see Figure 29 named tt t and t Within the first limit t lt Ti lt t the cellular module is in the normal working range the Safe Area In the Warning Area t lt Ti lt t or t lt Ti lt t the cellular module is still inside the valid temperature range but the measured temperature approaches the limit upper or lower The module sends a warning to the user through the active AT communication interface which can take if possible the necessary actions to return to a safer temperature range or simply ignore the indication The module is still in a valid and good working condition Outside the valid temperature range Ti lt t or Ti gt LJ the device is working outside the specified range and represents a dangerous working condition This condition is indicated and the device shuts down to avoid
140. d to antenna pads as shown in Figure 44 Take care that the PCB to RF cable transition strip line and antenna pads must be designed so that the characteristic impedance is as close as possible to 50 Q see the following subsections for specific guidelines regarding RF transmission line design and RF termination design If an external antenna is required consider that the connector is typically rated for a limited number of insertion cycles In addition the RF coaxial cable may be relatively fragile compared to other types of cables To increase application ruggedness connect UEL to a more robust connector e g SMA or MMCX fixed on panel or on flange as shown in Figure 44 MPCI L2 series Stripline Microstrip Internal Antenna BS Screw Fastener for Mini PCle Baseboard Application Chassis gt Connector to External Antenna MPCI L2 series f 4 amp Screw Fastener for Mini PCle Baseboard Figure 44 Example of RF connections U FL to U FL cable for internal antenna and U FL to SMA for external antenna UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 91 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Guidelines for RF transmission line design Any RF transmission line such as the ones from the ANT1 and ANT2 pads up to the related antenna connector or up to the related internal antenna pad must be designed so that the chara
141. damage L For security reasons the shutdown is suspended in case an emergency call in progress In this case the device will switch off at call termination L The user can decide at anytime to enable disable the Smart Temperature Supervisor feature If the feature is disabled there is no embedded protection against disallowed temperature conditions UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 67 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Figure 30 shows the flow diagram implemented for the Smart Temperature Supervisor IF STS enabled Feature enabled Yes full logic or indication only Feature disabled no action Read temperature Temperature is within normal operating range Previously outside of Safe Area No further actions Yes Tempetature is back to safe area Tempetature is outside valid temperature range Tempetature is within warning area Send notification Send notification Send notification dangerous IF Full Logic Enabled Feature enabled in indication only mode no further actions Featuere enabled in full logic mode emerg call in progress Wait emergency call termination Send shutdown notification Shut the device down Figure 30 Smart Temperature Supervisor STS flow diagram
142. de or the host device shall bear a second label stating Contains IC 8595A TOBYL200 resp Contains IC 8595A TOBYL201 resp Contains IC 8595A TOBYL210 resp Contains IC 8595A TOBYL280 resp Canada Industry Canada IC Notices This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian CAN ICES 3 B NMB 3 B and RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions o this device may not cause interference o this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Approvals Page 146 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Radio Frequency RF Exposure Information The radiated output power of the u blox Cellular Module is below the Industry Canada IC radio frequency exposure limits The u blox Cellular Module should be used in such a manner such that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized This device has been evaluated and shown compliant with the IC RF Exposure limits under mobile exposure conditions antennas are greater than 20 cm from a person s body This device has been certified for use in Canada Status of the listing in the Industry Canada s REL Radio Equipment List can be found at the following web address http www ic gc ca app sitt reltel srch nwRdSrch do lang eng Additional Canadian information on RF exposure also can be found at
143. dule integrates one TOBY L2 series module The MPCI L200 integrates a TOBY L200 module The MPCI L210 integrates a TOBY L210 module The MPCI L280 integrates a TOBY L280 module The TOBY L2 module represents the core of the device providing the related LTE 3G 2G modem and processing functionalities Additional signal conditioning circuitry is implemented for PCI Express Mini Card compliance and two UF L connectors are available for easy antenna integration PERST ANTI Signal LED WWAN U FL 4 Conditioning W_DISABLE TOBY L2 4 lt lt Y series i ANT2 M i e EES VCC Boost 3 3Vaux Supply Converter Figure 2 MPCI L2 series block diagram UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 11 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 2 1 Internal blocks As described in Figure 2 each MPCI L2 series module integrates one TOBY L2 series module which consists of the following internal sections RF baseband and power management RF section The RF section is composed of RF transceiver PAs LNAs crystal oscillator filters duplexers and RF switches Tx signal is pre amplified by RF transceiver then output to the primary antenna input output port ANT1 of the module via power amplifier PA SAW band pass filters band specific duplexer and antenna switch Dual receiving paths are implemented according to LTE Down Link MIMO 2
144. dule to transmit at maximum power proper grounding helps prevent module overheating UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 82 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 2 2 RTC supply output V BCKP L The RTC supply V_BCKP pin is not available on MPCI L2 series modules 2 2 2 1 Guidelines for V_BCKP circuit design TOBY L2 series modules provide the V_BCKP RTC supply input output which can be mainly used to Provide RTC back up when VCC supply is removed If RTC timing is required to run for a time interval of T s when VCC supply is removed place a capacitor with a nominal capacitance of C uF at the V_BCKP pin Choose the capacitor using the following formula C pF Current Consumption uA x T s Voltage Drop V 1 25 xT s For example a 100 pF capacitor can be placed at V BCKP to provide RTC backup holding the V BCKP voltage within its valid range for around 80 s at 25 C after the VCC supply is removed If a longer buffering time is required a 70 mF super capacitor can be placed at V BCKP with a 4 7 kQ series resistor to hold the V BCKP voltage within its valid range for approximately 15 hours at 25 C after the VCC supply is removed The purpose of the series resistor is to limit the capacitor charging current due to the large capacitor specifications and also to let a fast rise time of the voltage value at the V BCKP pin after VCC supply has been provided
145. e The module processor core is activated during idle mode and the 26 MHz reference clock frequency is used It would draw more current during the paging period than that in the power saving mode Figure 10 illustrates a typical example of the module current consumption profile when power saving is disabled In such case the module is registered with the network and while active mode is maintained the receiver is periodically activated to monitor the paging channel for paging block reception Detailed current consumption values can be found in TOBY L2 Data Sheet 1 and in MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 Current mA 100 0 Keen Time s Current mA Paging period 2G case 0 44 2 09 s 3G case 0 61 5 09 s LTE case 0 32 2 56 s Time ms RX Enabled lt gt ACTIVE MODE Figure 10 VCC or 3 3Vaux current consumption profile with power saving disabled and module registered with the network active mode is always held and the receiver is periodically activated to monitor the paging channel for paging block reception UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 28 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 5 2 RTC supply input output V BCKP LS The RTC supply V_BCKP pin is not available on MPCI L2 series modules The V_BCKP pin of TOBY L2 series modules connects the supply for the Real Time Clock RTC A linear LDO regulator integrated in the Power Management Unit interna
146. e Guidelines for HOST_SELECTO and HOST_SELECT1 pins circuit design will be described in detail in a successive release of the document Do not apply voltage to HOST_SELECTO and HOST_SELECT1 pins before the switch on of their supply source V_INT to avoid latch up of circuits and allow a proper boot of the module If the external signals connected to the cellular module cannot be tri stated or set low insert a multi channel digital switch e g TI SN74CB3Q16244 TS5A3159 or TS5A63157 between the two circuit connections and set to high impedance before V INT switch on ESD sensitivity rating of the HOST SELECTO and HOST SELECT 1 pins is 1 kV HBM as per JESD22 A1 14 Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection e g EPCOS CAO5PAS14THSG varistor array close to accessible points If the HOST SELECTO and HOST SELECT1 pins are not used they can be left unconnected on the application board 2 3 3 2 Guidelines for HOST SELECTx layout design The input pins for the selection of the module configuration by the host application processor HOST SELECTO and HOST SELECT are generally not critical for layout UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 88 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 4 Antenna interface TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules provide two RF interfaces for connecting the external
147. e VCC 3 3Vaux bypass capacitors in the picoFarad range should be placed as close as possible to the VCC 3 3Vaux pins in particular if the application device integrates an internal antenna Ensure an optimal grounding connecting each GND pin with application board solid ground layer Use as many vias as possible to connect the ground planes on multilayer application board providing a dense line of vias at the edges of each ground area in particular along RF and high speed lines Keep routing short and minimize parasitic capacitance on the SIM lines to preserve signal integrity USB D USB D traces should meet the characteristic impedance requirement 90 Q differential and 30 Q common mode and should not be routed close to any RF line part Keep the SDIO traces short avoid stubs avoid coupling with any RF line part and consider low value series damping resistors to avoid reflections and other losses in signal integrity Ensure appropriate RF precautions for the Wi Fi and Cellular technologies coexistence as described in section 2 6 4 and in the Wi Fi Cellular Integration Application Note 15 Ensure appropriate RF precautions for the GNSS and Cellular technologies coexistence as described in the GNSS Implementation Application Note 14 Route analog audio signals away from noisy sources primarily RF interface VCC switching supplies The audio outputs lines on the application board must be wide enough to minimize series res
148. e applications Any external digital audio device compliant with the configuration of the digital audio interface of the TOBY L2 cellular module can be used given that the external digital audio device must provide The slave role opposite role of TOBY L2 modules which act as master only The same mode and frame format PCM short synch mode or Normal Va long synch mode with o data in 2 s complement notation o MSB transmitted first o data word length 16 bit 16 clock cycles o frame length synch signal period 32 bit 32 clock cycles The same sample rate i e synch signal frequency configurable by AT UI2S I2S sample rate parameter o 8kHz o 16kHz The same serial clock frequency o 32x I2S sample rate Compatible voltage levels 1 80 V typ otherwise it is recommended to connect the 1 8 V digital audio interface of the module to the external 3 0 V or similar digital audio device by means of appropriate unidirectional voltage translators e g TI SN74AVC41774 or SN74AVC2T245 providing partial power down feature so that the digital audio device 3 0 V supply can be also ramped up before V INT 1 8 V supply using the module V INT output as 1 8 V supply for the voltage translators on the module side Support of the side tone which is not available in the internal audio processing system of TOBY L2 modules as summarized in Figure 26 The side tone is a part of the user s speech on uplink path that should be listened on do
149. e information This document may be revised by u blox at any time For most recent documents please visit www u blox com Copyright 2015 u blox AG u blox is a registered trademark of u blox Holding AG in the EU and other countries PCI PCI Express PCle and PCI SIG are trademarks or registered trademarks of PCI SIG Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries All other registered trademarks or trademarks mentioned in this document are property of their respective owners UBX 13004618 R12 Page 2 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Preface u blox Technical Documentation As part of our commitment to customer support u blox maintains an extensive volume of technical documentation for our products In addition to our product specific technical data sheets the following manuals are available to assist u blox customers in product design and development AT Commands Manual This document provides the description of the AT commands supported by the u blox cellular modules System Integration Manual This document provides the description of u blox cellular modules system from the hardware and the software point of view it provides hardware design guidelines for the optimal integration of the cellular modules in the application device and it provides information on how to set up production and final product tests o
150. e of the ANT2 port over the operating frequency range reducing as much as possible the amount of reflected power Efficiency gt 1 5 dB gt 7096 recommended The radiation efficiency is the ratio of the radiated power 3 0 dB 5096 acceptable to the power delivered to antenna input the efficiency is a measure of how well an antenna receives or transmits The radiation efficiency of the antenna connected to the ANT2 port needs to be enough high over the operating frequency range to comply with the Over The Air OTA radiated performance requirements as the TIS specified by applicable related certification schemes Table 9 Summary of secondary Rx antenna RF interface ANT2 requirements Item Requirements Remarks Efficiency imbalance lt 0 5 dB recommended The radiation efficiency imbalance is the ratio of the 1 0 dB acceptable primary ANT1 antenna efficiency to the secondary ANT2 antenna efficiency the efficiency imbalance is a measure of how much better an antenna receives or transmits compared to the other antenna The radiation efficiency of the secondary antenna needs to be roughly the same of the radiation efficiency of the primary antenna for good RF performance Envelope Correlation lt 0 4 recommended The Envelope Correlation Coefficient ECC between the Coefficient 0 5 acceptable primary ANT1 and the secondary ANT2 antenna is an indicator of 3D radiation pattern similarity between the two anten
151. e pin can be left unconnected 2 9 1 3 Guidelines for W_DISABLE and LED_WWAN layout design The W_DISABLE and LED_WWAN4g circuits are generally not critical for layout 2 10 Reserved pins RSVD Le Pins reserved for future use marked as RSVD are not available on MPCI L2 series TOBY L2 series modules have pins reserved for future use All the RSVD pins are to be left unconnected on the application board except the RSVD pin number 6 which must be connected to ground as described in Figure 70 TOBY L2 series RSVD ZZ RSVD BENI E Figure 70 Application circuit for the reserved pins RSVD UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 124 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 11 Module placement An optimized placement allows a minimum RF Ines length and closer path from DC source for VCC 3 3Vaux Make sure that the module analog parts and RF circuits are clearly separated from any possible source of radiated energy In particular digital circuits can radiate digital frequency harmonics which can produce Electro Magnetic Interference that affects the module analog parts and RF circuits performance Implement proper countermeasures to avoid any possible Electro Magnetic Compatibility issue Make sure that the module RF and analog parts circuits and high speed digital circuits are clearly separated from any sensitive part circuit which may be affecte
152. ed TLS SSL functionalities see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 1 15 10 AssistNow clients and GNSS integration L AssistNow clients and u blox GNSS receiver integration are not available on the MPCI L2 series modules L AssistNow clients and u blox GNSS receiver integration are not supported by the TOBY L2 series modules 00 01 02 and 60 product versions For customers using u blox GNSS receivers TOBY L2 series cellular modules feature embedded AssistNow clients AssistNow A GPS provides better GNSS performance and faster Time To First Fix The clients can be enabled and disabled with an AT command see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 TOBY L2 series cellular modules act as a stand alone AssistNow client making AssistNow available with no additional requirements for resources or software integration on an external host micro controller Full access to u blox GNSS receivers is available via the TOBY L2 series cellular module through the DDC PC interface while the available GPIOs can handle the positioning chipset module power on off This means that cellular module and GNSS receiver can be controlled through a single serial port from any host processor 1 15 11 Hybrid positioning and CellLocate L Hybrid positioning and CellLocate are not available on MPCI L2 series L Hybrid positioning and CellLocate are not supported by the TOBY L2 series modules 00 01 02 and 60 product versions Although GNS
153. el could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting a very low capacitance ESD protection e g Tyco Electronics PESD0402 140 ESD close to accessible points L If the SDIO interface pins are not used they can be left unconnected on the application board 2 6 4 2 Guidelines for SDIO layout design The SDIO serial interface requires the same consideration regarding electro magnetic interference as any other high speed digital interface Keep the traces short avoid stubs and avoid coupling with RF lines parts or sensitive analog inputs since the signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency Consider the usage of low value series damping resistors see the application circuit in Figure 65 Table 41 to avoid reflections and other losses in signal integrity which may create ringing and loss of a square wave shape UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 117 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 7 Audio interface 2 7 4 Digital audio interface Le The PS interface is not available on MPCI L2 series modules 2 7 1 1 Guidelines for digital audio circuit design L The I S interface is not supported by TOBY L2 modules 00 01 and 60 product versions the pins should not be driven by any external device l S digital audio interface can be connected to an external digital audio device for voic
154. ell or set of cells historical observations as follows 1 Several devices reported their position to the CellLocate server when observing a specific cell the As in the picture represent the position of the devices which observed the same cell A A A A ApA A A A A A A A AA A A A A NN GEL A A UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 63 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 3 If a new device reports the observation of Cell A CellLocate is able to provide the estimated position from the area of visibility ZEN 4 The visibility of multiple cells provides increased accuracy based on the intersection of areas of visibility E intersection Cell A N Cell B N Cell C CellLocate is implemented using a set of two AT commands that allow configuration of the CellLocate service AT ULOCCELL and requesting position according to the user configuration AT ULOC The answer is provided in the form of an unsolicited AT command including latitude longitude and estimated accuracy L The accuracy of the position estimated by CellLocate depends on the availability of historical observations in the specific area Hybrid positioning With u blox Hybrid positioning technology u blox cellular devices can be triggered to provide their current position using either a u blox GNSS receiver or the position estimated from CellLocate The choice depends on w
155. emory interface controller Dedicated peripheral blocks for control of the USB SIM and GPIO digital interfaces Analog front end interfaces to RF transceiver ASIC Memory system which includes NAND flash and LPDDR Voltage regulators to derive all the subsystem supply voltages from the module supply input VCC Voltage sources for external use V_BCKP and V_INT not available on MPCI L2 series modules Hardware power on Hardware reset Low power idle mode support 32 768 kHz crystal oscillator to provide the clock reference in the low power idle mode which can be set by enable power saving configuration using the AT UPSV command UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 12 of 162 biox 1 3 Pin out TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 3 1 TOBY L2 series pin assignment Table 3 lists the pin out of the TOBY L2 series modules with pins grouped by function Function Pin Name Pin No Power vcc 70 71 72 GND 2 30 32 44 46 69 73 74 76 78 79 80 82 83 85 86 88 90 92 152 V_BCKP 3 V_INT 5 System PWR_ON 20 RESET_N 23 HOST_SELECTO 26 HOST_SELECT1 62 Antennas ANT1 81 ANT2 87 ANT_DET 75 UBX 13004618 R12 yo N A Vo Vo Description Module supply input Ground RTC supply input output Generic digital interfaces supply output Power on input External reset input Selection of module configuration by the host processor Selection of module
156. er which is always regulated by the network the current base station sending power control commands to the module These power control commands are logically divided into a slot of 666 us thus the rate of power change can reach a maximum rate of 1 5 kHz There are no high current peaks as in the 2G connection since transmission and reception are continuously enabled due to FDD WCDMA implemented in the 3G that differs from the TDMA implemented in the 2G case In the worst scenario corresponding to a continuous transmission and reception at maximum output power approximately 250 mW or 24 dBm the average current drawn by the module at the VCC pins is considerable see the Current consumption section in TOBY L2 Data Sheet 1 or in MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 At the lowest output RF power approximately 0 01 uW or 50 dBm the current drawn by the internal power amplifier is strongly reduced The total current drawn by the module at the VCC pins is due to baseband processing and transceiver activity Figure 7 shows an example of current consumption profile of the module in 3G WCDMA DC HSPA continuous transmission mode Current mA 700 600 rmn lata iat I A AEN PATETAN TEN SN S i E e ERRES 500 Current consumption value 400 depends on TX power and actual antenna load 300 200 EG Ji EE Ee 100 0 Time ms 3G frame 10 ms 1 frame 15 slots 14 Figure 7 VCC or 3 3Vaux current consumption profile ve
157. eries resistance since the lines are connected to low impedance speaker transducer Avoid coupling of any noisy signal to speaker lines it is recommended to route speaker lines away from module VCC supply line any switching regulator line RF antenna lines digital lines and any other possible noise source Avoid coupling between speaker receiver and microphone lines Optimize the mechanical design of the application device the position orientation and mechanical fixing for example using rubber gaskets of speaker and microphone parts in order to avoid echo interference between downlink path and uplink path In case of external audio device providing differential speaker receiver output route speaker signal lines as a differential pair embedded in ground up to reduce differential noise pick up The balanced configuration will help reject the common mode noise Cross other signals lines on adjacent layers with 90 crossing Place bypass capacitor for RF close to the speaker UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 121 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 8 General Purpose Input Output Le Le GPIOs are not supported by TOBY L2 modules 00 01 and 60 product versions except for the Wireless Wide Area Network status indication configured on the GPIO1 the pins should not be driven by any external device GPIOs are not available on MPCI L2 series modules 2
158. es in combination with the cellular modules before implementing this in the production L Casting will void the warranty 3 3 11 Grounding metal covers Attempts to improve grounding by soldering ground cables wick or other forms of metal strips directly onto the EMI covers is done at the customer s own risk The numerous ground pins should be sufficient to provide optimum immunity to interferences and noise L u blox gives no warranty for damages to the cellular modules caused by soldering metal cables or any other forms of metal strips directly onto the EMI covers 3 3 12 Use of ultrasonic processes The cellular modules contain components which are sensitive to Ultrasonic Waves Use of any Ultrasonic Processes cleaning welding etc may cause damage to the module L u blox gives no warranty against damages to the cellular modules caused by any Ultrasonic Processes UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Handling and soldering Page 142 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 4 Approvals L For the complete list of all the certification schemes approvals of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules and the corresponding declarations of conformity see the u blox web site http Avww u blox com 4 1 Product certification approval overview Product certification approval is the process of certifying that a product has passed all tests and criteria required by specifications typically called
159. es modules L SIM detection interface GPIO5 is not supported by the TOBY L2 modules 00 01 and 60 product versions the pin should not be driven by any external device 2 5 1 Guidelines for SIM circuit design Guidelines for SIM cards SIM connectors and SIM chips selection The ISO IEC 7816 the ETSI TS 102 221 and the ETSI TS 102 671 specifications define the physical electrical and functional characteristics of Universal Integrated Circuit Cards UICC which contains the Subscriber Identification Module SIM integrated circuit that securely stores all the information needed to identify and authenticate subscribers over the LTE 3G 2G network Removable UICC SIM card contacts mapping is defined by ISO IEC 7816 and ETSI TS 102 221 as follows Contact C1 VCC Supply gt It must be connected to VSIM or UIM PWR Contact C2 RST Reset It must be connected to SIM RST or UIM RESET Contact C3 CLK Clock It must be connected to SIM CLK or UIM CLK Contact C4 AUX1 Auxiliary contact It must be left not connected Contact C5 GND Ground It must be connected to GND Contact C6 2 VPP Programming supply It must be connected to VSIM or UIM PWR Contact C7 I O Data input output It must be connected to SIM_IO or UIM_DATA Contact C8 AUX2 Auxiliary contact It must be left not connected A removable SIM card can have 6 contacts C1 C2 C3 C5 C6 C7 or 8 contacts also including the auxiliary contacts C4 and C8 Only 6 contact
160. et low insert a multi channel digital switch e g TI SN74CB3Q16244 TS5A3159 or TS5A63157 between the two circuit connections and set to high impedance before V_INT switch on L ESD sensitivity rating of UART interface pins is 1 kV Human Body Model according to JESD22 A114 Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection e g EPCOS CAO5PAS14THSG varistor array close to accessible points L If the UART interface pins are not used they can be left unconnected on the application board but it is recommended providing accessible test points directly connected to all the UART pins TXD RXD RTS CTS DTR DSR DCD RI for diagnostic purpose in particular providing a O Q series jumper on each line to detach each UART pin of the module from the DTE application processor 2 6 2 2 Guidelines for UART layout design The UART serial interface requires the same consideration regarding electro magnetic interference as any other digital interface Keep the traces short and avoid coupling with RF line or sensitive analog inputs since the signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 111 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 6 3 DDC IC interface C8 The PC bus compatible Display Data Channel interface is not available on MPC
161. etal case Do not place the antennas in close vicinity to end user since the emitted radiation in human tissue is limited by regulatory requirements Place the antennas far from sensitive analog systems or employ countermeasures to reduce EMC issues Take care of interaction between co located RF systems since the LTE 3G 2G transmitted power may interact or disturb the performance of companion systems Place the two LTE 3G antennas providing low Envelope Correlation Coefficient ECC between primary ANT1 and secondary ANT2 antenna the antenna 3D radiation patterns should have lobes in different directions The ECC between primary and secondary antenna needs to be enough low to comply with the radiated performance requirements specified by related certification schemes as indicated in Table 10 Place the two LTE 3G antennas providing enough high isolation see Table 10 between primary ANT1 and secondary ANT2 antenna The isolation depends on the distance between antennas separation of at least a quarter wavelength required for good isolation antenna type using antennas with different polarization improves isolation antenna 3D radiation patterns uncorrelated patterns improve isolation UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 94 of 162 biox Examples of antennas Table 26 lists some examples of possible internal on board surface mount antennas Manufacturer Taoglas Taoglas Taoglas Part Numbe
162. external circuit design in Not supported by 00 01 02 60 product versions See section 1 6 4 for functional description See section 2 3 3 for external circuit design in ain Tx Rx antenna interface 50 Q nominal characteristic impedance Antenna circuit affects the RF performance and application device compliance with required certification schemes See section 1 7 for functional description requirements See section 2 4 for external circuit design in Rx only for MIMO 2x2 and Rx diversity 50 Q nominal characteristic impedance Antenna circuit affects the RF performance and application device compliance with required certification schemes See section 1 7 for functional description requirements See section 2 4 for external circuit design in Not supported by 00 01 60 product versions See section 1 7 2 for functional description See section 2 4 2 for external circuit design in Early Production Information System description Page 13 of 162 biox Function Pin Name SIM VSIM SIM_IO SIM_CLK SIM_RST USB VUSB_DET USB_D USB_D UBX 13004618 R12 Pin No 59 57 56 58 27 28 UO Vo Vo Vo TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Description SIM supply output SIM data SIM clock SIM reset USB detect input USB Data Line D USB Data Line D Early Production Information Re
163. f delivering to VCC or 3 3Vaux pins the maximum peak pulse current consumption during Tx burst at maximum Tx power specified in TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 or in MPCI L2 series Data Sheet 2 Power dissipation the power handling capability of the LDO linear regulator must be checked to limit its junction temperature to the maximum rated operating range i e check the voltage drop from the max input voltage to the minimum output voltage to evaluate the power dissipation of the regulator Figure 34 and the components listed in Table 17 show an example of a power supply circuit where the VCC or 3 3Vaux module supply is provided by an LDO linear regulator capable of delivering the required current with proper power handling capability It is recommended to configure the LDO linear regulator to generate a voltage supply value slightly below the maximum limit of the module VCC or 3 3Vaux normal operating range e g 4 1 V for the VCC and 3 44 V for the 3 3Vaux as in the circuits described in Figure 34 and Table 17 This reduces the power on the linear regulator and improves the thermal design of the circuit TOBY L2 series vcc 24 iN our 4 e e o VCC P E vcc cl m R2 C2 C3 Ka SHDN ADJ GND 2 e M GND MPCI L2 series 3 3Vaux 3 3Vaux 3 3Vaux 3 3Vaux 3 3Vaux IN OUT L Ut 1 SHDN ADJ GND Figure 34 S
164. f the u blox EasyFlash tool and for diagnostic purpose see section 1 9 1 for functional description TOBY L2 series modules additionally provide the following serial communication interfaces UART interface asynchronous serial interface available for the communication with an external host application processor for AT commands data communication FW upgrade by means of the FOAT feature see section 1 9 2 for functional description DDC interface IC bus compatible interface available for the communication with u blox GNSS positioning chips modules and with external l C devices as an audio codec see section 1 9 3 for functional description SDIO interface Secure Digital Input Output interface available for the communication with an external Wi Fi chip or module see section 1 9 4 for functional description 1 9 1 Universal Serial Bus USB 1 9 1 1 USB features TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules include a High Speed USB 2 0 compliant interface with maximum data rate of 480 Mb s representing the main interface for transferring high speed data with a host application processor the USB interface is available for AT commands data communication FW upgrade by means of the FOAT feature FW upgrade by means of the u blox EasyFlash tool and for diagnostic purpose The module itself acts as a USB device and can be connected to a USB host such as a Personal Computer or an embedded application microprocessor equipped with compatible drivers The U
165. face can be set to two modes by the lt I2S_mode gt parameter of the AT UI2S command e PCM mode short synchronization signal IS word alignment signal is set high for 1 or 2 clock cycles for the synchronization and then is set low for 31 or 30 clock cycles according to the 32 clock cycles frame length e Normal l S mode long synchronization signal l S word alignment is set high low with a 50 duty cycle high for 16 clock cycles low for 16 clock cycles according to the 32 clock cycles frame length The modules support IS master role only DS CLK clock and DS WA world alignment synchronization signal are generated by the module The sample rate of transmitted received words which corresponds to the l S word alignment synchronization signal frequency can be set by the I2S sample rate parameter of AT UI2S to e 8kHz e 16kHz The modules support TS transmit and l S receive data 16 bit words long linear mono Data is transmitted and read in 2 s complement notation MSB is transmitted and read first S clock signal frequency is set to 32 x I2S sample rate the frame length which corresponds to the TS word alignment synchronization signal period is 32 IS clock cycles long L For the complete description of the possible configurations and settings of the I S digital audio interface for PCM and Normal Va modes refer to the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 UI2S AT command The internal audio processing syste
166. fective units are analyzed in detail to improve the production quality This is achieved with automatic test equipment ATE in production line which logs all production and measurement data A detailed test report for each unit can be generated from the system Figure 80 illustrates typical automatic test equipment ATE in a production line The following typical tests are among the production tests e Digital self test firmware download Flash firmware verification IMEI programming e Measurement of voltages and currents e Adjustment of ADC measurement interfaces e Functional tests USB interface communication SIM card communication e Digital tests GPIOs and other interfaces e Measurement and calibration of RF characteristics in all supported bands such as receiver S N verification frequency tuning of reference clock calibration of transmitter and receiver power levels etc e Verification of RF characteristics after calibration i e modulation accuracy power levels spectrum etc are checked to ensure they are all within tolerances when calibration parameters are applied Figure 80 Automatic test equipment for module tests UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Product testing Page 150 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 5 2 Test parameters for OEM manufacturer Because of the testing done by u blox with 100 coverage an OEM manufacturer does not need to repeat firmwa
167. for selection of module configuration by the host SDIO serial data 2 SDIO serial clock SDIO command SDIO serial data 0 SDIO serial data 3 SDIO serial data 1 Ground o Module Supply Input 3 40 V 4 35 V normal range High 2G current pulses Switch on applying VCC Ground Antenna Detection Input Ground Reserved Ground RF Antenna Input Output Up to six LTE bands Up to five 3G bands Four 2G bands Ground Reserved Ground RF Antenna Input LTE MIMO 2x2 3G Rx diversity Ground Reserved Ground Table 51 TOBY L1 and TOBY L2 pin assignment with remarks for migration Not supported by 00 01 60 product versions Not supported by current product version Not supported by 00 01 02 60 product versions UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Remarks for migration Reserved gt DC Reserved gt DC No functional No functional No functional No functional Reserved gt H Reserved gt S Reserved gt S Reserved gt S Reserved gt S Reserved gt S difference difference difference difference OST_SELECT1 DIO DIO DIO DIO DIO Reserved gt S DIO No VCC functional difference Reserved gt ANT_DET No RF functional difference Different operating bands support No RF functional difference Different operating bands support Appendix Page 156 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual A 3 S
168. ful Information when Contacting Technical Support When contacting Technical Support have the following information ready Module type TOBY L200 and firmware version Module configuration Clear description of your question or the problem A short description of the application Your complete contact details UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Preface Page 3 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Contents ire M 3 C ntents P eee 4 1 System description LB G n S X 8 EN We EE 8 L EELER ee tM eege a a a TE 11 1 2 1 luurieeecc e EE 12 D XEM JI EE 13 1 3 1 TOBY L2 series pin assignment ene ener nennen ener nennen 13 1 3 2 MPCI L2 series pin assignment ssssssssssssseseene eee ener enne nennen nennen 18 TAs Operating MODES EE 20 PEE Zauarscmc ttem Em 22 1 5 1 Module supply input VCC or 3 3VaUX eene en 22 1 5 2 RTC supply input output V BCKP ssssssssssssssseeeeeee eee emere nr ener enn nennen ns 29 1 5 8 Generic digital interfaces supply output V INT memes 30 1 6 System function interfaces ssssssssssssssssssseee eee eereneereee irren nennen enne 31 1 6 1 M d l eleme 31 UCNE ER 1 6 3 Module EE 35 1 6 4 Module configuration selection by host proceseot memes 35 T7 Antenna INTE EEN 36 1 7 1 Antenna RF interfaces ANTT ZANTZ ee emere er ener nnne nn nr n
169. g call notification is not supported by 00 01 and 60 product versions The RI output line can notify an SMS arrival When the SMS arrives the RI line switches from OFF to ON for 1 s see Figure 22 if the feature is enabled by AT CNMI command see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 1s bk mm RI OFF RI ON m n time s SMS arrives Figure 22 RI behavior at SMS arrival This behavior allows the DTE to stay in power saving mode until the DCE related event requests service For SMS arrival if several events coincidently occur or in quick succession each event independently triggers the RI line although the line will not be deactivated between each event As a result the RI line may stay to ON for more than 1 s if an incoming call is answered within less than 1 s with ATA or if auto answering is set to ATSO 1 than the RI line is set to OFF earlier so that L RI line monitoring cannot be used by the DTE to determine the number of received SMSes L For multiple events incoming call plus SMS received the RI line cannot be used to discriminate the two events but the DTE must rely on subsequent URCs and interrogate the DCE with the proper commands The RI line can additionally notify all the URCs and or all the incoming data in PPP and Direct Link connections if the feature is enabled by the AT URING command for more details see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 the RI line is asserted whe
170. g transistor as shown in Figure 63 implementing the GNSS supply enable function If this feature is not required the V INT supply output can be directly connected to the u blox 1 8 V GNSS receiver so that it will switch on when V INT output is enabled According to the V INT supply output voltage ripple characteristic specified in the TOBY L2 Data Sheet 1 Additional filtering may be needed to properly supply an external LNA depending on the characteristics of the used LNA adding a series ferrite bead and a bypass capacitor e g the Murata BLM15HD182SN1 ferrite bead and the Murata GRM1555C1H220J 22 pF capacitor at the input of the external LNA supply line u blox GNSS TOBY L2 series 1 8 V receiver except 00 01 60 02 versions V BCKP V BCKP 1V8 sap n TP VCC E EE 1 e REM V_INT To RS 1V8 1V8 M R4 GNSS supply enabled GPIO2 SDA2 SCL2 GNSS data reach TxD1 GPIO3 Figure 63 Application circuit for connecting TOBY L2 modules to u blox 1 8 V GNSS receivers using V_INT as supply Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer R1 R2 4 7 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RCO0402JR 074K7L Yageo Phycomp R3 47 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RC0402JR 0747KL Yageo Phycomp R4 10 KQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RC0402JR 0710KL Yageo Phycomp R5 100 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RC0402JR 07100KL Yageo Phycomp T1 P Channel MOSFET Low On Resistance IRLML6401 International Rectifier
171. ging source has a relatively low nominal voltage 5 V If both a permanent primary supply charging source e g 12 V and a rechargeable back up battery e g 3 7 V Li Pol are available at the same time in the application as possible supply source then a proper charger regulator with integrated power path management function can be selected to supply the module while simultaneously and independently charging the battery See 2 2 1 7 2 2 1 8 and 2 2 1 6 2 2 1 9 2 2 1 10 for specific design in The use of a primary not rechargeable battery is in general uncommon but appropriate parts can be selected given that the most cells available are seldom capable of delivering the maximum current specified in TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 during connected mode Carefully evaluate the usage of super capacitors as supply source since aging and temperature conditions significantly affect the actual capacitor characteristics See 2 2 1 5 and 2 2 1 6 2 2 1 9 2 2 1 10 for specific design in Rechargeable 3 cell Li lon or Li Pol and Ni MH chemistry batteries reach a maximum voltage that is above the maximum rating for the 3 3Vaux supply of MPCI L2 modules and should therefore be avoided The use of rechargeable not rechargeable battery or super capacitors is very uncommon for Mini PCI Express applications so that these supply sources types are not considered for MPCI L2 modules The usage of more than one DC supply at the same time should be carefully eva
172. he RF line 50 O e g the active pad of UFL connectors needs to have a GND keep out i e clearance a void area at least on first inner layer to reduce parasitic capacitance to ground If integrated antennas are used the RF terminations are represented by the integrated antennas themselves The following guidelines should be followed Use antennas designed by an antenna manufacturer providing the best possible return loss or V S W R Provide a ground plane large enough according to the relative integrated antenna requirements The ground plane of the application PCB can be reduced down to a minimum size that must be similar to one quarter of wavelength of the minimum frequency that has to be radiated As numerical example Frequency 750 MHz gt Wavelength 40 cm gt Minimum GND plane size 10 cm It is highly recommended to strictly follow the detailed and specific guidelines provided by the antenna manufacturer regarding correct installation and deployment of the antenna system including PCB layout and matching circuitry Further to the custom PCB and product restrictions antennas may require a tuning to comply with all the applicable required certification schemes It is recommended to consult the antenna manufacturer for the design in guidelines for the antenna matching relative to the custom application Additionally these recommendations regarding the antenna system placement must be followed Do not place antennas within closed m
173. her device interfaces from which depends the RF performance Ay To avoid module damage during transmitter test a proper antenna according to module specifications or a 50 Q termination must be connected to ANT1 port A To avoid module damage during receiver test the maximum power level received at ANT1 and ANT2 ports must meet module specifications L The AT UTEST command sets the module to emit RF power ignoring LTE 3G 2G signaling protocol This emission can generate interference that can be prohibited by law in some countries The use of this feature is intended for testing purpose in controlled environments by qualified user and must not be used during the normal module operation Follow instructions suggested in u blox documentation u blox assumes no responsibilities for the inappropriate use of this feature Figure 81 illustrates a typical test setup for such RF functional test Cellular Wideband Application TOBY L2 series antenna antenna Processor MPCI L2 series Sped AT EE pectrum commands Analyzer TX or Power Meter Application Board Cellular f antennas Wideband Application TOBY L2 series antenna Processor MPCI L2 series AT ENS J i commands Signal RX Generator Application Board Figure 81 Setup with spectrum analyzer or power meter and signal generator for radiated measurements UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production I
174. hich positioning method provides the best and fastest solution according to the user configuration exploiting the benefit of having multiple and complementary positioning methods Hybrid positioning is implemented through a set of three AT commands that allow configuration of the GNSS receiver AT ULOCGNSS configuration of the CellLocate service AT ULOCCELL and requesting the position according to the user configuration AT ULOC The answer is provided in the form of an unsolicited AT command including latitude longitude and estimated accuracy if the position has been estimated by CellLocate and additional parameters if the position has been computed by the GNSS receiver The configuration of mobile network cells does not remain static e g new cells are continuously added or existing cells are reconfigured by the network operators For this reason when a Hybrid positioning method has been triggered and the GNSS receiver calculates the position a database self learning mechanism has been implemented so that these positions are sent to the server to update the database and maintain its accuracy UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 64 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual The use of hybrid positioning requires a connection via the DDC CH bus between the TOBY L2 series cellular module and the u blox GNSS receiver see sections 1 9 3 and 2 6 3 See GNSS Implementati
175. his pin must be connected to GND Reserved UART DSR Output GPIO T RI Output GPIO T DCD Output GPIO T DTR Input GPIO T RTS Input T CTS Output T Data Input UART Data Output Reserved P2 Power on Input nternal 50k pull up to VCC GPIO WWAN status indication on 00 01 and 60 product versions GPIO Reset signal Input nternal 50k pull up to VCC Reset Switch on Switch off GPIO GPIO Input for selection of module configuration by the host USB Data I O D USB Data I O D Reserved Ground Reserved Ground Reserved Ground Reserved Ground Reserved PS Word Alignment GPIO PS Data Output GPIO PS Clock GPIO PS Data Input GPIO Early Production Information TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Remarks for migration RTC back up No gt Yes No difference leave unconnected as reserved or not supported No functional difference No connect Connect to GND Reserved UA Reserved UA Reserved UA Reserved UA Reserved UA Reserved gt UART Reserved gt UART Reserved gt UART GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO A eS e iem prem rere Pull up External gt Internal No functional difference Internal pull up V BCKP gt VCC Switch off gt Reset Switch on off Reserved gt HOST_SELECTO No functional difference No functional difference Reserved gt 12S GPIO
176. ickness and installation guidelines Updated MPCI L2 power off procedure Updated MPCI L2 pins 3 5 44 46 definition Not Connected instead of GPI GPO Updated GPIOs definition and description Additional design in examples minor corrections and improvements Updated FW version for Engineering Samples Additional design in and minor corrections Changed status to Early Production Information Updated VUSB DET description and application circuits the VUSB DET functionality is not supported and the pin should be left unconnected or it should not be driven high Added maximum antenna gain requirements as per FCC RF radiation exposure limits Corrected MPCI L2 pinout Additional design in and minor corrections Added description and design in for TOBY L2xx 50S i e the 50 product version updated UART SDIO GPIO sections Added description and design in for TOBY L280 00S and TOBY L201 015 updated UART FTP HTTP FOTA sections and any other applicable section Document status reverted to Objective Specification Added description and design in for TOBY L200 02S TOBY L210 02S MPCI L200 02S and MPCI L210 02S product versions Changed status to Early Production Information Added description and design in for TOBY L210 60S MPCI L210 60S product versions Document status reverted to Advance Information Document status reverted to Objective Specification Added description and design in for TOBY L220 02S TOBY L280 02S M
177. ies modules is described in Figure 42 and Table 24 section 2 3 2 SIM interface The following precautions are suggested for TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules SIM interface depending on the application board handling to satisfy ESD immunity test requirements A bypass capacitor of about 22 pF to 47 pF e g Murata GRM1555C1H470J must be mounted on the lines connected to the SIM interface pins to assure SIM interface functionality when an electrostatic discharge is applied to the application board enclosure It is suggested to use as short as possible connection lines at SIM pins Maximum ESD sensitivity rating of SIM interface pins is 1 kV Human Body Model according to JESD22 A1 14 Higher protection level could be required if SIM interface pins are externally accessible on the application board The following precautions are suggested to achieve higher protection level A low capacitance i e less than 10 pF ESD protection device e g Tyco Electronics PESD0402 140 should be mounted on each SIM interface line close to accessible points i e close to the SIM card holder The SIM interface application circuit implemented in the EMC ESD approved reference designs of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules is described in Figure 49 and Table 30 section 2 5 Other pins and interfaces All the module pins that are externally accessible on the device integrating TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series module should be included in the ESD immunity test
178. ies power on sequence description Le d 4 The Internal Reset signal is not available on a module pin but the host application can monitor e The V INT pin to sense the start of the TOBY L2 module power on sequence e The USB interface to sense the start of the MPCI L2 module power on sequence the module as USB device informs the host of the attach event via a reply on its status change pipe for proper bus enumeration process according to Universal Serial Bus Revision 2 0 specification 7 Before the switch on of the generic digital interface supply source V_INT of the module no voltage driven by an external application should be applied to any generic digital interface of TOBY L2 module Before the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series module is fully ready to operate the host application processor should not send any AT command over the AT communication interfaces USB UART of the module UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 32 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 6 2 Module power off TOBY L2 series can be properly switched off by AT CPWROFF command see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 The current parameter settings are saved in the module s non volatile memory and a proper network detach is performed The MPCI L2 series modules do not switch off by the AT CPWROFF command as the TOBY L2 modules but the AT CPWROFF command causes a reset reboot of the
179. ies with radiation exposure limits prescribed for an uncontrolled environment for fixed and mobile use conditions This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and the body of the user or nearby persons This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except as authorized in the certification of the product The gain of the system antenna s used for the TOBY L200 TOBY L210 MPCI L200 MPCI L210 modules i e the combined transmission line connector cable losses and radiating element gain must not exceed 9 8 dBi in 700 MHz i e LTE FDD 17 band 4 3 dBi in 850 MHz i e GSM 850 or UMTS FDD 5 or LTE FDD 5 band 5 5 dBi in 1700 MHz Le AWS or UMTS FDD 4 or LTE FDD 4 band 2 8 dBi in 1900 MHz Le GSM 1900 or UMTS FDD 2 or LTE FDD 2 band 6 0 dBi in 2500 MHz i e LTE FDD 7 band for mobile and fixed or mobile operating configurations The gain of the system antenna s used for TOBY L201 modules i e the combined transmission line connector cable losses and radiating element gain must not exceed 9 8 dBi 700 MHz i e LTE FDD 17 band 10 2 dBi 750 MHz i e LTE FDD 13 band 10 0 dBi 850 MHz i e UMTS FDD 5 or LTE FDD 5 band 6 8 dBi 1700 MHz i e AWS or LTE FDD 4 band 8 5 dBi 1900 MHz i e UMTS FDD 2 or LTE FDD 2 band for mobile and fixed or mobile operating configurations The gain of the system antenna s used f
180. ightly below the maximum limit of the module VCC normal operating range e g 4 1 V as in the circuit described in Figure 35 and Table 18 This reduces the power on the linear regulator and improves the whole thermal design of the supply circuit TOBY L2 series TI vcc 21 in out 4 e e o VCC E ut d vcc cl R1 C2 C3 EN ADJ GND 3 R2 r MEN GND 2I iN OUT e ci R cO L 1 EN AD GND MPCI L2 series 3 3Vaux 3 3Vaux 3 3Vaux 3 3Vaux 3 3Vaux GND Figure 35 Suggested schematic design for the VCC and 3 3Vaux supply application circuit using an LDO linear regulator Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer C1 C2 10 pF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0603 20 6 3 V GRM188R60J106ME47 Murata C3 330 pF Capacitor Tantalum D SIZE 6 3 V 45 mQ T520D337MO006ATE045 KEMET R1 27 kQ Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W RC0402JR 0727KL Yageo Phycomp R2 4 7 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RC0402JR 074K7L Yageo Phycomp R3 12 kQ Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W RC0402JR 0712KL Yageo Phycomp R4 2 7 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RC0402JR 072K7L Yageo Phycomp U1 LDO Linear Regulator ADJ 3 0 A LP38501ATJ ADJ NOPB Texas Instrument Table 18 Suggested components for VCC voltage supply application circuit using an LDO linear regulator 2 2 1 4 Guidelines for VCC supply circuit design using a rechargeable Li lon or Li Pol battery Rechargeable Li lon o
181. ils see the Wi Fi Cellular Integration Application Note 15 1 15 13 Firmware update Over AT FOAT This feature allows upgrading the module firmware over USB UART serial interfaces using AT commands The UFWUPD AT command triggers a reboot followed by the upgrade procedure at specified a baud rate A special boot loader on the module performs firmware installation security verifications and module reboot Firmware authenticity verification is performed via a security signature during the download The firmware is then installed overwriting the current version In case of power loss during this phase the boot loader detects a fault at the next wake up and restarts the firmware download After completing the upgrade the module is reset again and wakes up in normal boot For more details about Firmware update Over AT procedure see the Firmware Update Application Note 6 and the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 UFWUPD AT command 1 15 14 Firmware update Over The Air FOTA L Firmware update Over The Air FOTA is not supported by 00 and 60 product versions This feature allows upgrading the module firmware over the LTE 3G 2G air interface In order to reduce the amount of data to be transmitted over the air the implemented FOTA feature requires downloading only a delta file instead of the full firmware The delta file contains only the differences between the two firmware versions old and new and is compressed The f
182. in Not supported by 00 product versions 1 8 V output Circuit 106 CTS in ITU T V 24 Add Test Point and series 0 Q to access for diagnostic See section 1 9 2 for functional description See section 2 6 2 for external circuit design in Not supported by 00 product versions 1 8 V input Circuit 105 RTS in ITU T V 24 Internal active pull up to V_INT Add Test Point and series 0 Q to access for diagnostic See section 1 9 2 for functional description See section 2 6 2 for external circuit design in UART DSR not supported by 00 product versions GPIO not supported by 00 01 60 versions 1 8 V Circuit 107 in ITU T V 24 configurable as GPIO Add Test Point and series 0 Q to access for diagnostic See section 1 9 2 and 1 11 for functional description See section 2 6 2 and 2 8 for external circuit design in RI not supported by 00 product versions GPIO not supported by 00 01 60 versions 1 8 V Circuit 125 in ITU T V 24 configurable as GPIO Add Test Point and series 0 Q to access for diagnostic See section 1 9 2 and 1 11 for functional description See section 2 6 2 and 2 8 for external circuit design in UART DTR not supported by 00 product versions GPIO not supported by 00 01 60 versions 1 8 V Circuit 108 2 in ITU T V 24 configurable as GPIO Internal active pull up to V INT when configured as DTR Add Test Point and series 0 Q to access for diagnosti See section 1
183. in Figure 52 the application processor will drive the SIM switch using its own GPIO to properly select the SIM that is used by the module Another GPIO may be used to handle the SIM hot insertion removal function of TOBY L2 modules which can also be handled by other external circuits or by the cellular module GPIO according to the application requirements The dual SIM connection circuit described in Figure 52 can be implemented for SIM chips as well providing proper connection between SIM switch and SIM chip as described in Figure 50 If it is required to switch between more than 2 SIM a circuit similar to the one described in Figure 52 can be implemented in case of 4 SIM circuit using proper 4 throw switch instead of the suggested 2 throw switches Follow these guidelines to connect the module to two external SIM connectors Use a proper low on resistance i e few ohms and low on capacitance i e few pF 2 throw analog switch e g Fairchild FSA2567 as SIM switch to ensure high speed data transfer according to SIM requirements Connect the contacts C1 VCC and C6 VPP of the two UICC SIM to the VSIM UIM_PWR pin of the module by means of a proper 2 throw analog switch e g Fairchild FSA2567 Connect the contact C7 I O of the two UICC SIM to the SIM IO UIM DATA pin of the module by means of a proper 2 throw analog switch e g Fairchild FSA2567 Connect the contact C3 CLK of the two UICC SIM to the SIM CLK UIM CLK pin of the m
184. in the application Force ventilation air flow within mechanical enclosure Provide a heat sink component attached to the module top side with electrically insulated high thermal conductivity adhesive or on the backside of the application board below the cellular module as a large part of the heat is transported through the GND pads of the TOBY L2 series LGA modules and dissipated over the backside of the application board UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 129 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual For example the Module to Ambient thermal resistance Rth M A is strongly reduced with forced air ventilation and a heat sink installed on the back of the application board decreasing the module temperature variation Beside the reduction of the Module to Ambient thermal resistance implemented by proper application hardware design the increase of module temperature can be moderated by proper application software implementation Enable power saving configuration using the AT UPSV command see section 1 15 18 Enable module connected mode for a given time period and then disable it for a time period enough long to properly mitigate temperature increase 2 15 ESD guidelines The sections 2 15 1 and 2 15 2 are related to EMC ESD immunity The modules are ESD sensitive devices The ESD sensitivity for each pin as Human Body Model according to JESD22 A1 14F is specified in TOBY
185. ing operation Carefully follow the suggestions provided in the relative section 2 3 for schematic and layout design 7 Other supplies V BCKP RTC supply and V INT generic digital interfaces supply Accurate design is required to guarantee proper functionality Follow the suggestions provided in the corresponding sections 2 2 2 and 2 2 3 for schematic and layout design 8 Other digital interfaces UART TC IS Host Select GPIOs Mini PCle specific signals and Reserved pins Accurate design is required to guarantee proper functionality Follow the suggestions provided in sections 2 6 2 2 6 3 2 7 1 2 3 3 2 8 2 9 and 2 10 for schematic and layout design UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 70 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 2 Supply interfaces 2 2 1 Module supply VCC or 3 3Vaux 2 2 1 1 General guidelines for VCC or 3 3Vaux supply circuit selection and design VCC or 3 3Vaux pins are internally connected Application design shall connect all the available pads to the external supply to minimize the power loss due to series resistance GND pins are internally connected Application design shall connect all the available pads to solid ground on the application board since a good low impedance connection to external ground can minimize power loss and improve RF and thermal performance TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules must be sourced through the VCC or the 3 3
186. initely UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 51 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual The CTS output line is driven to the ON or OFF state when the module is either able or not able to accept data from the DTE over the UART Figure 23 illustrates the CTS output line toggling due to paging reception and data received over the UART with AT UPSV 1 configuration Data input Y CTS OFF CTS ON i i time s 9 2 s default Figure 23 CTS output pin indicates when module s UART is enabled CTS ON low level or disabled CTS OFF high level AT UPSV 2 power saving enabled and controlled by the RTS line This configuration can only be enabled with the module hardware flow control disabled i e AT amp KO setting The UART interface is disabled after the DTE sets the RTS line to OFF Afterwards the UART is enabled again and the module does not enter low power idle mode as following If an OFF to ON transition occurs on the RTS input line this causes the UART module wake up after 5 ms recognition of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the complete wake up and the UART is kept enabled as long as the RTS input line is set to ON If the module needs to transmit some data e g URC the UART is temporarily enabled to send data If the DTE sends data the first character sent causes the UART and module wake up after 5 ms the recognitio
187. irmware update procedure can be triggered using dedicated AT command with the delta file stored in the module file system via over the air FTP For more details about Firmware update Over The Air procedure see the Firmware Update Application Note 6 and the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 UFWINSTALL AT command UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 65 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 15 15 In band Modem eCall ERA GLONASS L In band modem for eCall ERA GLONASS emergency applications is not supported by TOBY L2 series modules 00 01 02 and 60 product versions and by MPCI L2 series modules In band Modem solution for eCall and ERA GLONASS emergency call applications over cellular networks is implemented according to 3GPP TS 26 267 17 BS EN 16062 2011 18 and ETSI TS 122 101 19 specifications eCall European and ERA GLONASS Russian are initiatives to combine mobile communications and satellite positioning to provide rapid assistance to motorists in the event of a collision implementing automated emergency response system based the first on GPS the latter on GLONASS positioning system When activated the in vehicle systems IVS automatically initiate an emergency call carrying both voice and data including location data directly to the nearest Public Safety Answering Point PSAP to determine whether rescue services should be dispatched to the
188. istance 2 17 3 Antenna checklist v Antenna termination should provide 50 Q characteristic impedance with V S W R at least less than 3 1 recommended 2 1 on operating bands in deployment geographical area v Follow the recommendations of the antenna producer for correct antenna installation and deployment PCB layout and matching circuitry v Ensure compliance with any regulatory agency RF radiation requirement as reported in sections 4 2 2 and or 4 3 1 for products marked with the FCC and or IC v Ensure high and similar efficiency for both the primary ANT1 and the secondary ANT2 antenna v Ensure high isolation between the primary ANT 1 and the secondary ANT2 antenna v Ensure low Envelope Correlation Coefficient between the primary ANT1 and the secondary ANT2 antenna the 3D antenna radiation patterns should have radiation lobes in different directions v Ensure high isolation between the cellular antennas and any other antenna or transmitter UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 138 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 3 Handling and soldering L No natural rubbers no hygroscopic materials or materials containing asbestos are employed 3 1 Packaging shipping storage and moisture preconditioning For information pertaining to TOBY L2 series reels tapes MPCI L2 series trays Moisture Sensitivity levels MSD shipment and storage infor
189. istor is not required and should not be provided If connecting the W_DISABLE input to a push button the pin will be externally accessible on the application device According to EMC ESD requirements of the application an additional ESD protection device should be provided close to accessible point as described in Figure 68 and Table 44 L ESD sensitivity rating of the W_DISABLE pin is 1 kV HBM according to JESD22 A114 Higher protection level can be required if the line is externally accessible on the application board e g if an accessible push button is directly connected to the W_DISABLE pin and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection e g EPCOS CAO5PAS14THSG varistor close to accessible point An open drain output is suitable to drive the W DISABLE input from an application processor as it is equipped with an internal pull up to the 3 3Vaux supply as described in Figure 68 A compatible push pull output of an application processor can also be used In any case take care to set the proper level in all the possible scenarios to avoid an inappropriate disabling of the radio operations MPCI L2 series Application MPCI L2 series Processor 3 3Vaux 3 3Vaux Power on 22 kQ GE 22 kQ push button i Output T Ze W_DISABLE W_DISABLE X ESD xj Figure 68 W_DISABLE application circuit using a push button and an open drain output of an application processor Remarks CT0402S14AHSG EP
190. iting resistor indicating Wi Fi activity as additional optional feature The WLAN antenna RF input output ANT1 of the u blox ELLA W131 Wi Fi module is connected to a Wi Fi antenna with an appropriate series Wi Fi 2 4 GHz band pass filter specifically designed for the coexistence between the Wi Fi 2 4 GHz RF signals 2402 2482 MHz and the LTE band 7 RF signals 2500 2690 MHZ as for example the Wi Fi BAW 2 4 GHz band pass filter TDK EPCOS B9604 or the TriQuint 885071 or the TriQuint 885032 or the Avago ACPF 7424 or the Taiyo Yuden F6HF2G441AF46 All GND pins of the cellular module and the u blox ELLA W1 series Wi Fi module are connected to ground All the other pins of the u blox ELLA W1 series Wi Fi module are intended to be not connected UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 116 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual TOBY L2 series ELLA W131 cellular module Wi Fi module except 00 01 60 versions VCC LDO regulator 3V3 IN KM een e A 33 SHDNn SENE RB CU Jeun pyp C3 TFS w n L 4 V_INT ji ul Ke EH LED o VCC LDOregulato 1V8 5 IN OUT cS ur n ee vio Wi Fi SHDNn SENSE T A 1V8 Band Pass filter antenna vull Cean sve C4 T C6 L X i i ANTI RE SDIO_DO SD DO Fb oH 3 ANT2 EJ L SDIO_D1 SD_D1 E SDIO D2 SD D2 SDIO D3 SD D3 SDIO CLK SDIO CMD SD CLK SD CM
191. its related output circuit connected to the VCC pins must be capable of delivering a pulse current as the maximum peak current consumption during Tx burst at maximum Tx power specified in TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 and must be capable of extensively delivering a DC current as the maximum average current consumption specified in TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 The maximum discharge current is not always reported in battery data sheets but the maximum DC discharge current is typically almost equal to the battery capacity in Amp hours divided by 1 hour DC series resistance the non rechargeable battery with its output circuit must be capable of avoiding a VCC voltage drop below the operating range summarized in Table 7 during transmit bursts 2 2 1 6 Additional guidelines for VCC or 3 3Vaux supply circuit design To reduce voltage drops use a low impedance power source The series resistance of the power supply lines connected to the modules VCC 3 3Vaux and GND pins on the application board and battery pack should also be considered and minimized cabling and routing must be as short as possible to minimize power losses Three pins are allocated to VCC supply and five pins to 3 3Vaux supply Several pins are designated for GND connection Even if all the VCC 3 3Vaux pins and all the GND pins are internally connected within the module it is recommended to properly connect all of them to supply the module to minimize series resistance losses To
192. itted in the direction of peak radiation to that of an isotropic source The maximum gain of the antenna connected to ANT1 port must not exceed the herein stated value to comply with regulatory agencies radiation exposure limits For additional info see sections 4 2 2 and or 4 3 1 Input Power gt 33 dBm gt 2 W The antenna connected to the ANT1 port must support with adequate margin the maximum power transmitted by the modules Table 8 Summary of primary Tx Rx antenna RF interface ANT1 requirements UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 37 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Item Requirements Remarks Impedance 50 Q nominal characteristic impedance The impedance of the antenna RF connection must match the 50 Q impedance of the ANT2 port Frequency Range See the TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 and the The required frequency range of the antennas connected MPCI L2 series Data Sheet 2 to ANT2 port depends on the operating bands of the used cellular module and the used Mobile Network Return Loss S lt 10 dB VSWR lt 2 1 recommended The Return loss or the S as the VSWR refers to the S lt 6 dB VSWR lt 3 1 acceptable amount of reflected power measuring how well the secondary antenna RF connection matches the 50 Q characteristic impedance of the ANT2 port The impedance of the antenna termination must match as much as possible the 50 O nominal impedanc
193. ively configurable functions See section 1 11 for functional description See section 2 8 for external circuit design in GPIO2 22 VO GPIO Not supported by 00 01 60 product versions 1 8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions See section 1 11 for functional description See section 2 8 for external circuit design in GPIO3 24 VO GPIO Not supported by 00 01 60 product versions 1 8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions See section 1 11 for functional description See section 2 8 for external circuit design in GPIO4 25 VO GPIO Not supported by 00 01 60 product versions 1 8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions See section 1 11 for functional description See section 2 8 for external circuit design in GPIO5 60 VO GPIO Not supported by 00 01 60 product versions 1 8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions See section 1 11 for functional description See section 2 8 for external circuit design in GPIO6 61 VO GPIO Not supported by 00 01 60 product versions 1 8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions See section 1 11 for functional description See section 2 8 for external circuit design in Reserved RSVD 6 N A Reserved pin This pin must be connected to ground See section 2 10 RSVD 1 7 9 18 N A Reserved pin Leave unconnected 19 29 31 See section 2 10 33 43 45 47 49 77 84 91 Table 3 TOBY L2 series module pin defi
194. ke up i e after 5 ms Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive data otherwise data is lost UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 50 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual AT UPSV HW flow control RTS line DTR line Communication during idle mode and wake up 3 Enabled AT amp K3 ON ON Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE 3 Enabled AT amp K3 ON OFF Data sent by the DTE is buffered by the DTE and will be correctly received by he module when it is ready to receive data when the UART is enabled Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE 3 Enabled AT amp K3 OFF ON Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module Data sent by the module is buffered by the module and will be correctly received by the DTE when it is ready to receive data i e RTS line will be ON 3 Enabled AT amp K3 OFF OFF Data sent by the DTE is buffered by the DTE and will be correctly received by he module when it is ready to receive data when the UART is enabled Data sent by the module is buffered by the module and will be correctly received by the DTE when it is ready to receive data i e RTS line will be ON 3 Disabled AT amp KO ONorOFF ON Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module Data sen
195. l Protocol Time Division Duplex Time Division Multiple Access Total Isotropic Sensitivity Test Point Total Radiated Power Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter User Datagram Protocol Universal Integrated Circuit Card Up Link Transmission Universal Mobile Telecommunications System Universal Serial Bus Voltage Controlled Oscillator Voice over LTE Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Wireless Local Area Network IEEE 802 11 short range radio technology Wireless Local Area Network IEEE 802 11 short range radio technology Wireless Wide Area Network GSM UMTS LTE cellular radio technology Early Production Information Appendix Page 159 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Related documents ON AU P A Fa UJ VD D JO Un P 20 EN ER 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 u blox TOBY L2 series Data Sheet Docu No UBX 13004573 u blox MPCI L2 series Data Sheet Docu No UBX 13004749 u blox AT Commands Manual Docu No UBX 13002752 u blox EVK L2x User Guide Docu No UBX 14000422 u blox Windows Embedded OS USB Driver Installation Application Note Docu No UBX 14003263 u blox Firmware Update Application Note Docu No UBX 13001845 Universal Serial Bus Revision 2 0 specification http Avww usb org developers docs usb20_docs ITU T Recommendation V 24 02 2000 List of definitions for interchange circuits between Data Terminal Equipmen
196. lace prior baking procedures Temperature rise rate max 3 C s If the temperature rise is too rapid in the preheat phase it may cause excessive slumping Time 60 120s If the preheat is insufficient rather large solder balls tend to be generated Conversely if performed excessively fine balls and large balls will be generated in clusters End Temperature 150 200 C If the temperature is too low non melting tends to be caused in areas containing large heat capacity Heating reflow phase The temperature rises above the liquidus temperature of 217 C Avoid a sudden rise in temperature as the slump of the paste could become worse Limit time above 217 C liquidus temperature 40 60 s Peak reflow temperature 245 C Cooling phase A controlled cooling avoids negative metallurgical effects solder becomes more brittle of the solder and possible mechanical tensions in the products Controlled cooling helps to achieve bright solder fillets with a good shape and low contact angle Temperature fall rate max 4 C s UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Handling and soldering Page 140 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual L To avoid falling off modules should be placed on the topside of the motherboard during soldering The soldering temperature profile chosen at the factory depends on additional external factors like choice of soldering paste size thickness and properties of
197. le at the same time as possible supply source should implement a suitable charger regulator with integrated power path management function to supply the module and the whole device while simultaneously and independently charging the battery Figure 38 reports a simplified block diagram circuit showing the working principle of a charger regulator with integrated power path management function This component allows the system to be powered by a permanent primary supply source e g 12 V using the integrated regulator which simultaneously and independently recharges the battery e g 3 7 V Li Pol that represents the back up supply source of the system the power path management feature permits the battery to supplement the system current requirements when the primary supply source is not available or cannot deliver the peak system currents A power management IC should meet the following prerequisites to comply with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 7 High efficiency internal step down converter compliant with the performances specified in section 2 2 1 2 Low internal resistance in the active path Vout Vbat typically lower than 50 mQ High efficiency switch mode charger with separate power path control Power path management IC System 12V i NC Vin EEN Vout Source En DC DC converter H and battery FET La co
198. le device This is mandatory to meet the SAR requirements for portable devices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Additional Note as per 47CFR15 105 this equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures o Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna o Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver o Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected o Consultant the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help 4 3 Industry Canada notice Industry Canada IC Certification Numbers u blox TOBY L200 cellular modules 8595A TOBYL200 u blox TOBY L
199. lication Processor 3 0V DTE vcc TxD RxD RTS CTS DTR DSR RI DCD GND Unidirectional 3V0 Voltage Translator DIR3 Al e a A3 4 DIR2 DIRA GND VCCA VCCB rtl L DIRI B1 B2 B3 B4 OE u1 Pa TOBY L2 series 1 8V DCE V_INT DTR DSR RI DCD GND Figure 59 UART interface application circuit with partial V 24 link 5 wire in DTE DCE serial communication 3 0 V DTE Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer Ci C2 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10 16 V GRM155R61A104KA01 Murata U1 Unidirectional Voltage Translator SN74AVC4T774 Texas Instruments Table 36 Component for UART application circuit with partial V 24 link 5 wire in DTE DCE serial communication 3 0 V DTE Voltage translator providing partial power down feature so that the DTE 3 0 V supply can be also ramped up before V INT 1 8 V supply UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 109 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Providing the TXD and RXD lines only not using the complete V24 link If the functionality of the CTS RTS DSR DCD RI and DTR lines is not required in the application or the lines are not available then Connect the module RTS input line to GND or to the CTS output line of the module since the module requires RTS active low electrical level if HW flow control is ena
200. lly generates this supply as shown in Figure 11 with low current capability see the TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 The output of this regulator is always enabled when the main module voltage supply applied to the VCC pins is within the valid operating range TOBY L2 series Power Baseband Management Processor vcc ED vcc Ee Ur RTC vcc Ee V BCKP EJ I 32 kHz Figure 11 TOBY L2 series RTC supply V_BCKP simplified block diagram The RTC provides the module time reference date and time that is used to set the wake up interval during the low power idle mode periods and is able to make available the programmable alarm functions The RTC functions are available also in power down mode when the V_BCKP voltage is within its valid range specified in the Input characteristics of Supply Power pins table in TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 The RTC can be supplied from an external back up battery through the V_BCKP when the main module voltage supply is not applied to the VCC pins This lets the time reference date and time run until the V_BCKP voltage is within its valid range even when the main supply is not provided to the module Consider that the module cannot switch on if a valid voltage is not present on VCC even when the RTC is supplied through V_BCKP meaning that VCC is mandatory to switch on the module The RTC has very low current consumption but is highly tem
201. ltage profile High switching frequency for best performance and for smaller applications it is recommended to select a switching frequency 2 600 kHz since L C output filter is typically smaller for high switching frequency The use of a switching regulator with a variable switching frequency or with a switching frequency lower than 600 kHz must be carefully evaluated since this can produce noise in the VCC or 3 3Vaux voltage profile and therefore negatively impact LTE 3G 2G modulation spectrum performance An additional L C low pass filter between the switching regulator output to VCC or 3 3Vaux supply pins can mitigate the ripple at the input of the module but adds extra voltage drop due to resistive losses on series inductors PWM mode operation it is preferable to select regulators with Pulse Width Modulation PWM mode While in connected mode the Pulse Frequency Modulation PFM mode and PFM PWM modes transitions must be avoided to reduce the noise on the VCC or 3 3Vaux voltage profile Switching regulators can be used that are able to switch between low ripple PWM mode and high ripple PFM mode provided that the mode transition occurs when the module changes status from the idle active modes to connected mode It is permissible to use a regulator that switches from the PWM mode to the burst or PFM mode at an appropriate current threshold UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 72 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2
202. luated depending on the supply source characteristics different DC supply systems can result as mutually exclusive The following sections highlight some design aspects for each of the supplies listed above providing application circuit design in compliant with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 7 2 2 1 2 Guidelines for VCC or 3 3Vaux supply circuit design using a switching regulator The use of a switching regulator is suggested when the difference from the available supply rail to the VCC or the 3 3Vaux value is high since switching regulators provide good efficiency transforming a 12 V or greater voltage supply to the typical 3 8 V value of the VCC supply or the typical 3 3 V value of the 3 3Vaux supply The characteristics of the switching regulator connected to VCC or 3 3Vaux pins should meet the following prerequisites to comply with the module VCC or 3 3Vaux requirements summarized in Table 7 Power capability the switching regulator with its output circuit must be capable of providing a voltage value to the VCC or 3 3Vaux pins within the specified operating range and must be capable of delivering to VCC or 3 3Vaux pins the maximum peak pulse current consumption during Tx burst at maximum Tx power specified in the TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 or in the MPCI L2 series Data Sheet 2 Low output ripple the switching regulator together with its output circuit must be capable of providing a clean low noise VCC or 3 3Vaux vo
203. m is summarized in Figure 26 external digital audio devices can be interfaced directly to the digital signal processing part via the a digital interface Audio processing can be controlled by AT commands see Audio Interface and Audio Parameters Tuning sections in the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 TOBY L2 To Radio TX DS RXD Volume amp Mute From Radio RX DS TXD Volume amp Mute Tone Generator PCM Player Figure 26 TOBY L2 modules internal audio processing system block diagram L The internal audio processing system of TOBY L2 modules does not support the side tone UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 57 of 162 VP biox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 11 General Purpose Input Output Le Wireless Wide Area Network status indication configured on GPIO1 pin Le GPIOs are not available on MPCI L2 series modules GPIOs are not supported by TOBY L2 modules 00 01 and 60 product versions except for the TOBY L2 series modules include 14 pins GPIO1 GPIO6 I2S TXD I2S RXD DS CLK DS WA DTR DSR DCD RI that can be configured as General Purpose Input Output or to provide custom functions via u blox AT commands see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 UGPIOC UGPIOR UGPIOW AT commands as summarized in Table 13 Function Network status indication GNSS supply enable GNSS data ready SIM card detection SIM
204. marks VSIM 1 8 V 3 V output as per the connected SIM type See section 1 8 for functional description See section 2 5 for external circuit design in Data input output for 1 8 V 3 V SI Internal 4 7 kO pull up to VSIM See section 1 8 for functional description See section 2 5 for external circuit design in 3 25 MHz clock output for 1 8 V 3 V SIM See section 1 8 for functional description See section 2 5 for external circuit design in Reset output for 1 8 V 3 V SIM See section 1 8 for functional description See section 2 5 for external circuit design in Leave unconnected as VBUS detect is not supported nput for VBUS 5 V typical USB supply sense See section 1 9 1 for functional description See section 2 6 1 for external circuit design in USB interface for AT commands data communication FOAT FW update by u blox EasyFlash tool and diagnostic 90 Q nominal differential impedance Z 30 Q nominal common mode impedance Zey Pull up or pull down resistors and external series resistors as required by the USB 2 0 specifications 7 are part of the USB pad driver and need not be provided externally See section 1 9 1 for functional description See section 2 6 1 for external circuit design in USB interface for AT commands data communication FOAT FW update by u blox EasyFlash tool and diagnostic 90 Q nominal differential impedance Z 30 Q nominal common
205. matic periodic enable of the UART interface to receive send data with AT UPSV 1 see 1 9 2 4 Data received on UART interface with HW flow control disabled and power saving enabled see 1 9 2 4 RTS input set ON by the host DTE with HW flow control disabled and AT UPSV 2 see 1 9 2 4 DTR input set ON by the host DTE with AT UPSV 3 see 1 9 2 4 The connected SDIO device forces a wakeup of the module as SDIO host see 1 9 4 A preset RTC alarm occurs see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 AT CALA For the definition and the description of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules operating modes including the events forcing transitions between the different operating modes see the section 1 4 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 69 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 Design in 2 1 Overview For an optimal integration of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules in the final application board follow the design guidelines stated in this section Every application circuit must be properly designed to guarantee the correct functionality of the relative interface however a number of points require high attention during the design of the application device The following list provides a rank of importance in the application design starting from the highest relevance 1 Module antenna connection ANT1 ANT2 and ANT DET Antenna circuit directly affects the RF compliance of the de
206. mation as well as drying for preconditioning see the TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 the MPCI L2 series Data Sheet 2 and the u blox Package Information Guide 33 3 2 Handling The TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules are Electro Static Discharge ESD sensitive devices Ay Ensure ESD precautions are implemented during handling of the module Electrostatic discharge ESD is the sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field The term is usually used in the electronics and other industries to describe momentary unwanted currents that may cause damage to electronic equipment The ESD sensitivity for each pin of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules as Human Body Model according to JESD22 A114F is specified in the TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 or the MPCI L2 series Data Sheet 2 ESD prevention is based on establishing an Electrostatic Protective Area EPA The EPA can be a small working station or a large manufacturing area The main principle of an EPA is that there are no highly charging materials near ESD sensitive electronics all conductive materials are grounded workers are grounded and charge build up on ESD sensitive electronics is prevented International standards are used to define typical EPA and can be obtained for example from International Electrotechnical Commission IEC or American National Standards Institute
207. mended to consult the antenna manufacturer for the design in guidelines for antenna matching relative to the custom application In both of cases selecting external or internal antennas these recommendations should be observed Select antennas providing optimal return loss or V S W R figure over all the operating frequencies Select antennas providing optimal efficiency figure over all the operating frequencies Select antennas providing similar efficiency for both the primary ANT1 and the secondary ANT2 antenna Select antennas providing appropriate gain figure i e combined antenna directivity and efficiency figure so that the electromagnetic field radiation intensity do not exceed the regulatory limits specified in some countries e g by FCC in the United States as reported in the section 4 2 2 Select antennas capable to provide low Envelope Correlation Coefficient between the primary ANT1 and the secondary ANT2 antenna the 3D antenna radiation patterns should have lobes in different directions 2 4 1 2 Guidelines for antenna RF interface design Guidelines for TOBY L2 series ANT1 ANT2 pins RF connection design Proper transition between ANT1 ANT2 pads and the application board PCB must be provided implementing the following design in guidelines for the layout of the application PCB close to the ANT1 ANT2 pads On a multilayer board the whole layer stack below the RF connection should be free of digital lines Increase GN
208. mm GSM WCDMA LTE 690 960 MHz 1710 110 0x 21 0 mm Table 27 Examples of internal antennas with cable and connector UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information PCB Antenna with cable 2170 MHz 2300 2400 MHz 2500 2690 MHz PCB Antenna with cable and U FL 2170 MHz 2500 2700 MHz Design in Page 95 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Table 28 lists some examples of possible external antennas Manufacturer Part Number Product Name Description Taoglas GSA 8827 A 101111 Phoenix GSM WCDMA LTE adhesive mount antenna with cable and SMA M 698 960 MHz 1575 42 MHz 1710 2170 MHz 2490 2690 MHz 105 x 30 x 7 7 mm Taoglas TG 30 8112 GSM WCDMA LTE swivel dipole antenna with SMA M 698 960 MHz 1575 42 MHz 1710 2170 MHz 2400 2700 MHz 148 6 x 49 x 10 mm Taoglas MA241 BI 001 Genesis GSM WCDMA LTE MIMO 2in1 adhesive mount combination antenna waterproof IP67 rated with cable and SMA M 698 960 MHz 1710 2170 MHz 2400 2700 MHz 205 8 x 58 x 12 4 mm Laird Tech TRA6927M3PW 001 GSM WCDMA LTE screw mount antenna with N type F 698 960 MHz 1710 2170 MHz 2300 2700 MHz 83 8 x 36 5 mm Laird Tech CMS69273 GSM WCDMA LTE ceiling mount antenna with cable and N type F 698 960 MHz 1575 42 MHz 1710 2700 MHz 86 x 199 mm Laird Tech OC69271 FNM GSM WCDMA LTE pole mount antenna with N type M 698 960 MHz 1710 2690 MHz 248 x
209. mode impedance Z Pull up or pull down resistors and external series resistors as required by the USB 2 0 specifications 7 are part of the USB pad driver and need not be provided externally See section 1 9 1 for functional description See section 2 6 1 for external circuit design in System description Page 14 of 162 VP biox Function Pin Name UART RXD TXD CTS RTS DSR RI DTR DCD UBX 13004618 R12 Pin No yo O Vo O Vo Vo O Vo TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Description UART data output UART data input UART clear to send output UART ready to send input UART data set ready output GPIO UART ring indicator output GPIO UART data terminal ready input GPIO UART data carrier detect output GPIO Early Production Information Remarks Not supported by 00 product versions 1 8 V output Circuit 104 RXD in ITU T V 24 for AT command data communication FOAT Add Test Point and series 0 Q to access for diagnostic See section 1 9 2 for functional description See section 2 6 2 for external circuit design in Not supported by 00 product versions 1 8 V input Circuit 103 TXD in ITU T V 24 for AT command data communication FOAT Internal active pull up to V INT Add Test Point and series 0 Q to access for diagnostic See section 1 9 2 for functional description See section 2 6 2 for external circuit design
210. module due to the MPCI L2 modules internal configuration the command stores the actual parameter settings in the non volatile memory of MPCI L2 modules and performs a network detach with a subsequent reset reboot of the module An abrupt under voltage shutdown occurs on TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules when the VCC or 3 3Vaux module supply is removed If this occurs it is not possible to perform the storing of the current parameter settings in the module s non volatile memory or to perform the proper network detach Le It is highly recommended to avoid an abrupt removal of the VCC supply during TOBY L2 modules normal operations the power off procedure must be started by the AT CPWROFF command waiting the command response for a proper time period see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 and then a proper VCC supply has to be held at least until the end of the modules internal power off sequence which occurs when the generic digital interfaces supply output V_INT is switched off by the module It is highly recommended to avoid an abrupt removal of the 3 3Vaux supply during MPCI L2 modules normal operations the power off procedure must be started by setting the MPCI L2 module in the halt mode by the AT CFUN 127 command which stores the actual parameter settings in the non volatile memory of the module and performs a network detach waiting the command response for a proper time period see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 and then the 3
211. modules Do not apply voltage to any GPIO of TOBY L2 before the switch on of the GPIOs supply V INT to avoid latch up of circuits and allow a proper module boot If the external signals connected to the module cannot be tri stated or set low insert a multi channel digital switch e g TI SN74CB3Q16244 TS5A3159 TS5A63157 between the two circuit connections and set to high impedance before V INT switch on ESD sensitivity rating of the GPIO pins is 1 kV Human Body Model according to JESD22 A1 14 Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection e g EPCOS CAO5PAS14THSG varistor array close to accessible points If the GPIO pins are not used they can be left unconnected on the application board 2 8 1 1 Guidelines for general purpose input output layout design The general purpose inputs outputs pins are generally not critical for layout UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 122 of 162 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual biox 2 9 Mini PCle specific signals W_DISABLE LED_WWAN L Mini PCI Express specific signals W_DISABLE LED WWAND are not available on TOBY L2 series 2 9 1 1 Guidelines for W_DISABLE circuit design As described in Figure 68 the MPCI L2 series modules W_DISABLE wireless disable input is equipped with an internal pull up to the 3 3Vaux supply an external pull up res
212. must still be able to accept a certain number of characters after the RTS line is set to the OFF state the module guarantees the transmission interruption within two characters from RTS state change The module behavior according to the RTS hardware flow control status can be configured by AT commands for more details see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 AT amp K AT Q AT IFC AT commands If AT UPSV 2 is set and HW flow control is disabled the module monitors the RTS line to manage the power saving configuration for more details see section 1 9 2 4 and u blox AT Commands Manual 3 AT UPSV When an OFF to ON transition occurs on the RTS input the UART is enabled and the module is forced to active mode after 5 ms from the transition the switch is completed and data can be received without loss The module cannot enter low power idle mode and the UART is keep enabled as long as the RTS input line is held in the ON state If the RTS input line is set to the OFF state by the DTE the UART is disabled held in low power mode and the module automatically enters low power idle mode whenever possible UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 47 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual DSR signal behavior If AT amp S1 is set as it is by default the DSR module output line is set by default to the OFF state high level at UART initialization The DSR line is then set to the OFF sta
213. n UC master can communicate with more TC slaves in accordance to the IC bus specifications 13 The DDC I C interface is the only interface dedicated to communication between the u blox cellular module and u blox positioning receivers The AT commands interface is not available on the DDC l C interface The DDC l C interface pads of the module serial data SDA and serial clock SCL are open drain output and external pull up resistors must be used conforming to the l C bus specifications 13 u blox has implemented special features in the cellular modules to ease the design effort for the integration of a u blox cellular module with a u blox GNSS receiver details in GNSS Implementation Application Note 14 Combining a u blox cellular module with a u blox GNSS receiver allows designers to full access the GNSS receiver directly via the cellular module it relays control messages to the GNSS receiver via a dedicated DDC lC interface A 2 interface connected to the GNSS receiver is not necessary AT commands via the AT interfaces of the cellular module UART USB allows a full control of the GNSS receiver from any host processor u blox cellular modules feature embedded GNSS aiding that is a set of specific features developed by u blox to enhance GNSS performance decreasing Time To First Fix TTFF thus allowing to calculate the position in a shorter time with higher accuracy Additional custom functions over GPIO pins are designed
214. n application devices integrating the cellular modules Application Note These documents provide guidelines and information on specific hardware and or software topics on u blox cellular modules See Related documents for a list of Application Notes related to your Cellular Module How to use this Manual The TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual provides the necessary information to successfully design and configure the u blox cellular modules This manual has a modular structure It is not necessary to read it from the beginning to the end The following symbols are used to highlight important information within the manual L An index finger points out key information pertaining to module integration and performance AN A warning symbol indicates actions that could negatively impact or damage the module Questions If you have any questions about u blox Cellular Integration Read this manual carefully Contact our information service on the homepage http Awww u blox com Technical Support Worldwide Web Our website http Avww u blox com is a rich pool of information Product information technical documents can be accessed 24h a day By E mail Contact the closest Technical Support office by email Use our service pool email addresses rather than any personal email address of our staff This makes sure that your request is processed as soon as possible You will find the contact details at the end of the document Help
215. n feature so that the 3 0 V GNSS supply can be also ramped up before the V_INT 1 8 V cellular supply GPIO2 pin is connected to the shutdown input pin SHDNn of the LDO regulators providing the 3 0 V supply rail for the u blox 3 0 V GNSS receiver implementing the GNSS enable function with appropriate pull down resistor mounted on GPIO2 line to avoid an improper switch on of the u blox GNSS receiver The V BCKP supply output of the cellular module can be directly connected to the V BCKP backup supply input pin of the GNSS receiver as in the application circuit for a u blox 1 8 V GNSS receiver u blox GNSS TOBY L2 series 3 0 V receiver except 00 01 60 02 versions V BCKP 4 gEM v ECP 3v0 GNSS LDO Regulator VMAIN OUT IN GNSS supply enabled GND SHDNn GPIO2 u1 R3 I2C bus Bidirectional Voltage Translator VCCB VCCA OE SDAB SDAA SCLB SCLA GND u cl SDA2 SCL2 Unidirectional 3V0 Voltage Translator 1V8 VCCA VCCB C5 BIR T GNSS data ready TxD1 9 A1 B1 KE GPI03 A2 B2 4 DIR2 GND OEn I u3 Figure 64 Application circuit for connecting TOBY L2 modules to u blox 3 0 V GNSS receivers Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer
216. n nr sn nr snas 36 1 7 2 Antenna detection interface ANT DEI 39 ES E en 39 1 8 1 SIDE TN ACS EO REEL OUT STET 39 1 8 2 SIM detection interface sssssssssssse e enne eene nennen nennen nennen nnns 39 1 9 Data communication interfaces sssssssssssssseeeeeeeeene emen e nnn nennen nennen nen nnne 40 1 9 1 Universal Serial Bus USB 40 1 9 2 Asynchronous serial interface ART 44 1 9 3 DDE C iinet ees seht dioere edt ttd ree ette Diode De co a E 55 1 9 4 Secure Digital Input Output interface SDIO ssssssssssssee eene 56 1 10 DU m 57 1 03 Digital audio over TS Interfaddco ue eher seres ea e ries atentos BEA 57 1 11 General Purpose Input Output sssssssssssssssseeeee eene nennen nennen nennen nennen nnns 58 1 12 Mini PCle specific signals W_DISABLE LED WANN 59 1 13 Reserved pilis RSV ee aderenti ueste Mu USER DC REM IDE 59 1 14 Not connected pins NC 59 1 15 Systemi ET 60 LST Network INGICATION eT 60 LZ Antenna s petvIsOF i cede ettet ege eer hees Eeer eee 60 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Contents Page 4 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 15 3 Jamming detection ssssssssssssssssseeeeee eene nenne nennen nennen nennen nennen nnns 60 1154 IP imodes ot operations iaceat et ectetuer exei edet nas 61
217. n of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the complete wake up and the UART will be then kept enabled after the last data received according to the timeout previously set with the AT UPSV 1 configuration see the following subsection wake up via data reception The module automatically enters the low power idle mode whenever possible but it wakes up to active mode according to any required activity related to the network e g for the periodic paging reception described in section 1 5 1 5 or for any other required RF transmission reception or any other required activity related to the module functions interfaces including the UART itself The hardware flow control output CTS line indicates when the module is either able or not able to accept data from the DTE over the UART even if hardware flow control is disabled with AT UPSV 2 configuration AT UPSV 3 power saving enabled and controlled by the DTR line The UART interface is disabled after the DTE sets the DTR line to OFF Afterwards the UART is enabled again and the module does not enter low power idle mode as following If an OFF to ON transition occurs on the DTR input line this causes the UART module wake up after 5 ms recognition of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the complete wake up and the UART is kept enabled as long as the DTR input line is set to ON If the module needs to transmit some data e g URC the UART is temporarily enabled to send
218. n one of the configured events occur and it remains asserted for 1 s unless another configured event will happen with the same behavior described in Figure 22 L The AT URING command for the notification of all the URCs and or all the incoming data in PPP and Direct Link connections over the RI line is not supported by 00 01 and 60 product versions UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 49 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 9 2 4 UART and power saving The power saving configuration is controlled by the AT UPSV command for the complete description see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 When power saving is enabled the module automatically enters low power idle mode whenever possible and otherwise the active mode is maintained by the module see section 1 4 for definition and description of module operating modes referred to in this section The AT UPSV command configures both the module power saving and also the UART behavior in relation to the power saving The conditions for the module entering low power idle mode also depend on the UART power saving configuration as the module does not enter the low power idle mode according to any required activity related to the network within or outside an active call or any other required concurrent activity related to the functions and interfaces of the module including the UART interface The AT UPSV command ca
219. n set these different power saving configurations AT UPSV 0 power saving disabled default configuration AT UPSV 1 power saving enabled cyclically AT UPSV 2 power saving enabled and controlled by the UART RTS input line AT UPSV 3 power saving enabled and controlled by the UART DTR input line The different power saving configurations that can be set by the UPSV AT command are described in details in the following subsections Table 12 summarizes the UART interface communication process in the different power saving configurations in relation with the hardware flow control settings and the RTS input line status For more details on the UPSV AT command description see u blox AT commands Manual 3 AT UPSV HW flow control RTS line DTR line Communication during idle mode and wake up 0 Enabled AT amp K3 ON ON or OFF Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE 0 Enabled AT amp K3 OFF ON or OFF Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module Data sent by the module is buffered by the module and will be correctly received by the DTE when it is ready to receive data i e RTS line will be ON 0 Disabled AT amp KO ONorOFF ON or OFF Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive data otherwise the data is lost 1 Enabled AT amp K3 ON ON or OFF Data sent by the
220. n tool for the RF connector such as the Hirose U FL LP N or the Hirose U FL LP V N extraction jig according to the RF cable assembly type used Hook the end portion of the extraction jig onto the connector cover and pull off vertically in the direction of the connector mating axis as described in Figure 74 Le Extraction Jig RF Cable Assembly U FL Receptacle Figure 74 Precautions during RF connector extraction Any attempt to unplug the RF connectors by pulling on the cable assembly without using a suitable extraction tool may result in damage and affect the RF performance Do not forcefully twist deform or apply any excessive pull force to the RF cables or damage the RF connectors otherwise the RF performance may be reduced UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 128 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 14 Thermal guidelines L Modules operating temperature range is specified in TOBY L2 Data Sheet 1 and MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 The most critical condition concerning module thermal performance is the uplink transmission at maximum power data upload in connected mode when the baseband processor runs at full speed radio circuits are all active and the RF power amplifier is driven to higher output RF power This scenario is not often encountered in real networks for example see the Terminal Tx Power distribution for WCDMA taken
221. nal product specification This document applies to the following products Name Type number Modem version Application version PCN IN TOBY L200 TOBY L200 00S 00 09 71 A01 15 UBX 14044437 TOBY L200 02S 00 5 55 A01 01 UBX 15023663 TOBY L201 TOBY L201 01S 00 09 93 A01 07 UBX 15021135 TOBY L210 TOBY L210 00S 00 09 71 A01 15 UBX 14044437 TOBY L210 02S 00 5 55 A01 01 UBX 15023663 TOBY L210 60S 00 09 94 A01 00 UBX 15021694 TOBY L220 TOBY L220 025 00 5 57 A01 00 TBD TOBY L280 TOBY L280 025 00 5 61 A01 00 UBX 15029758 MPCI L200 MPCI L200 00S 00 09 71 A01 15 UBX 14044437 MPCI L200 025 00 5 55 A01 01 UBX 15023663 MPCI L210 MPCI L210 00S 00 09 71 A01 15 UBX 14044437 MPCI L210 025S 00 5 55 A01 01 UBX 15023663 MPCI L210 60S 00 09 94 A01 00 UBX 15021694 MPCI L280 MPCI L280 025 00 5 61 A01 00 UBX 15029758 u blox reserves all rights to this document and the information contained herein Products names logos and designs described herein may in whole or in part be subject to intellectual property rights Reproduction use modification or disclosure to third parties of this document or any part thereof without the express permission of u blox is strictly prohibited The information contained herein is provided as is and u blox assumes no liability for the use of the information No warranty either express or implied is given including but not limited with respect to the accuracy correctness reliability and fitness for a particular purpose of th
222. nas low ECC results from antenna patterns with radiation lobes in different directions The ECC between primary and secondary antenna needs to be enough low to comply with radiated performance requirements specified by related certification schemes Isolation 15 dB recommended The antenna to antenna isolation is the loss between the 10 dB acceptable primary ANT1 and the secondary ANT2 antenna high isolation results from low coupled antennas The isolation between primary and secondary antenna needs to be high for good RF performance Table 10 Summary of primary ANT1 and secondary ANT2 antennas relationship requirements UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 38 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 7 2 Antenna detection interface ANT DET Le Antenna detection ANT_DET is not available on MPCI L2 series modules L Antenna detection ANT DET is not supported by TOBY L2 00 01 and 60 product versions The antenna detection is based on ADC measurement The ANT DET pin is an Analog to Digital Converter ADC provided to sense the antenna presence The antenna detection function provided by ANT DET pin is an optional feature that can be implemented if the application requires it The antenna detection is forced by the UANTR AT command See the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 for more details on this feature The ANT DET pin generates a DC current
223. ncluding ESD immunity has been successfully performed on TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules reference design according to European Norms summarized in Table 48 The EMC ESD approved u blox reference designs consist of a TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series module installed onto a motherboard which provides supply interface SIM card and communication port External LTE 3G 2G antennas are connected to the provided connectors Since external antennas are used the antenna port can be separated from the enclosure port The reference design is not enclosed in a box so that the enclosure port is not identified with physical surfaces Therefore some test cases cannot be applied Only the antenna port is identified as accessible for direct ESD exposure Table 49 reports the u blox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series reference designs ESD immunity test results according to test requirements stated in the CENELEC EN 61000 4 2 23 ETSI EN 301 489 1 24 ETSI EN 301 489 7 25 and ETSI EN 301 489 24 26 Category Application Immunity Level Remarks Contact Discharge Enclosure 4 kV A kV to coupling planes indirect contact discharge Contact Discharges Enclosure port Not Applicable Test not applicable to u blox reference design because it to conducted surfaces does not provide enclosure surface direct contact discharge The test is applicable only to equipment providing conductive enclosure surface Antenna ports 4 kV A kV Test applicable to u blox refe
224. nd MPCI L2 series modules as additional feature for 3G DC HSDPA category 24 UEs The ANT2 pin of TOBY L2 series modules has a nominal characteristic impedance of 50 Q and must be connected to the secondary Rx antenna through a 50 Q transmission line to allow proper RF reception The ANT2 Hirose U FL R SMT coaxial connector receptacle of MPCI L2 series modules has a nominal characteristic impedance of 50 Q and must be connected to the secondary Rx antenna through a mated RF plug with a 50 Q coaxial cable assembly to allow proper RF reception The Multiple Input Multiple Output MIMO radio technology is an essential component of LTE radio systems based on the use of multiple antennas at both the transmitter and receiver sides to improve communication performance and achieve highest possible bit rate A MIMO m x n system consists of m transmit and n receive antennas where the data to be transmitted is divided into m independent data streams Note that the terms Input and Output refer to the radio channel carrying the signal not to the devices having antennas so that in the Down Link MIMO 2 x 2 system supported by TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules The LTE data stream is divided into 2 independent streams by the Tx antennas of the base station The cellular modules at the receiver side receives both LTE data streams by 2 Rx antennas ANT1 ANT2 Tx 1 Rx 1 Antenna Antenna Base Station TOBY L2 series MPCI L2 series Data St
225. nd UDP IP stack as well as Direct Link mode are not supported by the 00 and 60 product versions TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules provide embedded TCP IP and UDP IP protocol stack a PDP context can be configured established and handled via the data connection management packet switched data commands TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules provide Direct Link mode to establish a transparent end to end communication with an already connected TCP or UDP socket via serial interfaces USB UART In Direct Link mode data sent to the serial interface from an external application processor is forwarded to the network and vice versa For more details about embedded TCP IP and UDP IP functionalities see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 1 15 7 FTP L Embedded FTP services as well as Direct Link mode are not supported by 00 and 60 product versions TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series provide embedded File Transfer Protocol FTP services Files are read and stored in the local file system of the module FTP files can also be transferred using FTP Direct Link FTP download data coming from the FTP server is forwarded to the host processor via USB UART serial interfaces for FTP without Direct Link mode the data is always stored in the module s Flash File System FTP upload data coming from the host processor via USB UART serial interface is forwarded to the FTP server for FTP without Direct Link mode the data is read from the modules Flash
226. ne is externally accessible on the application board e g if accessible battery connector is directly connected to the supply pins Higher protection level can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection e g EPCOS CAO5PAS14THSG varistor close to accessible point UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 78 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 2 1 7 Guidelines for external battery charging circuit TOBY L2 modules do not have an on board charging circuit Figure 37 provides an example of a battery charger design suitable for applications that are battery powered with a Li lon or Li Polymer cell In the application circuit a rechargeable Li lon or Li Polymer battery cell that features proper pulse and DC discharge current capabilities and proper DC series resistance is directly connected to the VCC supply input of TOBY L2 module Battery charging is completely managed by the STMicroelectronics L6924U Battery Charger IC that from a USB power source 5 0 V typ charges as a linear charger the battery in three phases Pre charge constant current active when the battery is deeply discharged the battery is charged with a low current set to 10 of the fast charge current Fast charge constant current the battery is charged with the maximum current configured by the value of an external resistor to a value suitable for USB power source 500 mA Constant voltage when the batter
227. nection must be routed through a PCB area separated from RF lines parts sensitive analog signals and sensitive functional units it is good practice to interpose at least one layer of PCB ground between the VCC 3 3Vaux track and other signal routing Coupling between VCC 3 3Vaux and digital lines especially USB must be avoided The tank bypass capacitor with low ESR for current spikes smoothing described in section 2 2 1 6 should be placed close to the VCC 3 3Vaux pins If the main DC source is a switching DC DC converter place the large capacitor close to the DC DC output and minimize VCC 3 3Vaux track length Otherwise consider using separate capacitors for DC DC converter and module tank capacitor The bypass capacitors in the pF range described in Figure 36 and Table 19 should be placed as close as possible to the VCC 3 3Vaux pins This is highly recommended if the application device integrates an internal antenna Since VCC 3 3Vaux input provide the supply to RF Power Amplifiers voltage ripple at high frequency may result in unwanted spurious modulation of transmitter RF signal This is more likely to happen with switching DC DC converters in which case it is better to select the highest operating frequency for the switcher and add a large L C filter before connecting to the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules in the worst case If VCC 3 3Vaux is protected by transient voltage suppressor to ensure that the voltage maximum ratings
228. nformation Product testing Page 152 of 162 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual biox Appendix A Migration between TOBY L1 and TOBY L2 A 1 Overview TOBY L1 and TOBY L2 series cellular modules have exactly the same TOBY form factor 35 6 x 24 8 mm LGA with exactly the same 152 pin layout as described in Figure 82 so that the modules can be alternatively mounted on a single application board using exactly the same copper mask solder mask and paste mask o2 8289809009000000 o D o o 2 828990700000 o D o Zozoooooononcnnzoz Zozooonovcnocnnzoz Owe Oeerrererrrrerr Ur YU Owe Oneerrrrrrrrrere Ure U 32 E wo BOs oo SOs RsVD El D USB_D Rsvp ES be USB_D RSVD ER USB_D RSVD ER z USB_D RSVD EJ ee o RSVD Ge WA ER Boo EN HOST_SELECTO RSVD ER E GPIO4 Ge TXD 138 37 ER cPio4 RSVD GPIO3 12S_CLK ER GPio3 RSVD RESET_N I25 RXD RESET N RSVD EN GPIO2 scl EN GPIO2 RSVD GPIO1 SDA Ed ER Gro SIM CLK EN Eu PWR ON SIM CLK ER D D BP D D EJ PwRON auer a i HE sm RST m Ge VSIM EN 123 RSVD VSIM E 124 E RXD GPIO5 ES Kd RsvD GPIO5 ER Ed rop GPIO6 ER TO BY L1 RSVD GPIO6 TOBY L2 EH crs RSVD ER i ER Rsvp HOST_SELECT1 i E RTS RSVD Top view RSVD SDIO D2 Top view EH DTR RSVD ER RSVD SDIO CLK EN DCD RSVD KH Eu Er EN RsvD SDIO CMD Kl D EN R RSVD EN KU nsvD SpIO Do E KU sR RSVD BR mu EN Rsvp SDIO D3 WW Vi EN rsvp RSVD EN EN Rsvp SDIO D1 EN ER nsvD GND ER RSVD GND ER RSV
229. nition grouped by function UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 17 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 3 23 MPCI L2 series pin assignment Table 4 lists the pin out of the MPCI L2 series modules with pins grouped by function Function Pin Name Pin No UO Description Remarks Power 3 3Vaux 2 24 39 Module supply input 3 3Vaux pins are internally connected each other 41 52 3 3Vaux supply circuit affects the RF performance and compliance of the device integrating the module with applicable required certification schemes See section 1 5 1 for functional description and requirements for the 3 3Vaux module supply See section 2 2 1 for external circuit design in GND 4 9 15 18 N A Ground GND pins are internally connected each other 21 26 27 External ground connection affects the RF and thermal 29 34 35 performance of the device 37 40 43 50 See section 1 5 1 for functional description See section 2 2 1 for external circuit design in Auxiliary PERST 22 External reset input Internal 45 KQ pull up to 3 3 V supply Signals See section 1 6 3 for functional description See section 2 3 2 for external circuit design in Antennas ANT1 UEL VO Primary antenna Main Tx Rx antenna interface 50 Q nominal characteristic impedance Antenna circuit affects the RF performance and compliance of the device integrating the module with applicable requi
230. ntact C8 AUX2 Aux contact gt It must be left not connected A solderable SIM chip has 8 contacts and can also include the auxiliary contacts C4 and C8 for other uses but only 6 contacts are required and must be connected to the module SIM card interface as described above Solderable SIM chips are suitable for M2M applications where it is not required to change the SIM once installed UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 99 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Guidelines for single SIM card connection without detection A removable SIM card placed in a SIM card holder must be connected to the SIM card interface of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules as described in Figure 49 where the optional SIM detection feature is not implemented Follow these guidelines to connect the module to a SIM connector without SIM presence detection Connect the UICC SIM contacts C1 VCC and C6 VPP to the VSIM UIM_PWR pin of the module Connect the UICC SIM contact C7 I O to the SIM_IO UIM_DATA pin of the module Connect the UICC SIM contact C3 CLK to the SIM_CLK UIM_CLK pin of the module Connect the UICC SIM contact C2 RST to the SIM RST UIM RESET pin of the module Connect the UICC SIM contact C5 GND to ground Provide a 100 nF bypass capacitor e g Murata GRM155R71C104K on SIM supply line close to the relative pad of the SIM connector to prevent digital noise
231. ntrol logic Li lon Li Pol 7 Battery Pack Vbat Charge controller NH e GND GND RA L I Figure 38 Charger regulator with integrated power path management circuit block diagram Figure 39 and the components listed in Table 21 provide an application circuit example where the MPS MP2617 switching charger regulator with integrated power path management function provides the supply to the cellular module while concurrently and autonomously charging a suitable Li lon or Li Polymer battery with proper pulse and DC discharge current capabilities and proper DC series resistance according to the rechargeable battery recommendations described in section 2 2 1 4 The MP2617 IC constantly monitors the battery voltage and selects whether to use the external main primary supply charging source or the battery as supply source for the module and starts a charging phase accordingly The MP2617 IC normally provides a supply voltage to the module regulated from the external main primary source allowing immediate system operation even under missing or deeply discharged battery the integrated switching step down regulator is capable to provide up to 3 A output current with low output ripple and fixed 1 6 MHz switching frequency in PWM mode operation The module load is satisfied in priority then the integrated switching charger will take the remaining current to charge the battery Additionally the power path control allows an internal conne
232. oduct versions e Channel 7 SIM Access Profile not supported by 00 01 02 60 product versions Table 11 Default UART interface configuration 1 9 2 3 UART signals behavior At the module switch on before the UART interface initialization as described in the power on sequence reported in Figure 14 each pin is first tri stated and then is set to its relative internal reset state At the end of the boot sequence the UART interface is initialized the module is by default in active mode and the UART interface is enabled as AT commands interface The configuration and the behavior of the UART signals after the boot sequence are described below See section 1 4 for definition and description of module operating modes referred to in this section RXD signal behavior The module data output line RXD is set by default to the OFF state high level at UART initialization The module holds RXD in the OFF state until the module does not transmit some data TXD signal behavior The module data input line TXD is set by default to the OFF state high level at UART initialization The TXD line is then held by the module in the OFF state if the line is not activated by the DTE an active pull up is enabled inside the module on the TXD input For the definition of the interface data mode command mode and online command mode see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 See the pin description table in the TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1
233. odule by means of a proper 2 throw analog switch e g Fairchild FSA2567 Connect the contact C2 RST of the two UICC SIM to the SIM RST UIM RESET pin of the module by means of a proper 2 throw analog switch e g Fairchild FSA2567 Connect the contact C5 GND of the two UICC SIM to ground Provide a 100 nF bypass capacitor e g Murata GRM155R71C104K at the SIM supply VSIM UIM PWR close to the related pad of the two SIM connectors to prevent digital noise Provide a bypass capacitor of about 22 pF to 47 pF e g Murata GRM1555C1H470J on each SIM line very dose to each related pad of the two SIM connectors to prevent RF coupling especially in case the RF antenna is placed closer than 10 30 cm from the SIM card holders Provide a very low capacitance i e less than 10 pF ESD protection e g Tyco Electronics PESD0402 140 on each externally accessible SIM line close to each pad of the two SIM connectors according to the EMC ESD requirements of the custom application UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 103 of 162 biox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Limit capacitance and series resistance on each SIM signal to match the SIM requirements 27 7 ns is the maximum allowed rise time on clock line 1 0 us is the maximum allowed rise time on data and reset lines
234. of the module from the DTE application processor If the USB is not used provide accessible test points directly connected to the USB Dr and USB D pins Provide proper precautions for EMC ESD immunity as required on the application board Do not apply voltage to any generic digital interface pin of TOBY L2 series modules before the switch on of the generic digital interface supply source V INT All unused pins can be left unconnected except the RSVD pin number 6 of TOBY L2 series modules which must be connected to GND UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 137 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 17 2 Layout checklist The following are the most important points for a simple layout check v KE RH NN AA RA NANRAA A Check 50 Q nominal characteristic impedance of the RF transmission line connected to the ANT1 and the ANT2 ports antenna RF interfaces Ensure no coupling occurs between the RF interface and noisy or sensitive signals primarily analog audio input output signals SIM signals high speed digital lines such as SDIO USB and other data lines Optimize placement for minimum length of FF line Check the footprint and paste mask designed for TOBY L2 module as illustrated in section 2 12 VCC 3 3Vaux line should be wide and as short as possible Route VCC 3 3Vaux supply line away from RF lines parts and other sensitive analog lines parts Th
235. ofile of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 modules identifies itself by its VID Vendor ID and PID Product ID combination included in the USB device descriptor according to the USB 2 0 specifications 7 The VID and PID of the default USB profile configuration with the set of functions described above 1 RNDIS for Ethernet over USB and 1 CDC ACM for AT commands and data are the following VID 0x1546 PID 0x1146 Figure 19 summarizes the USB end points available with the default USB profile configuration Default profile configuration Function RNDIS Interface O Wireless Controller Remote NDIS Ly EndPoint Transfer Interrupt Interface 1 Communication Data P EndPoint Transfer Bulk EndPoint Transfer Bulk Interface 2 Communication Control AT commands Function CDC Serial EN EndPoint Transfer Interrupt Interface 3 Communication Data P EndPoint Transfer Bulk EndPoint Transfer Bulk Figure 19 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series USB End Points summary for the default USB profile configuration The USB of the modules can be configured by the AT UUSBCONF command for more details see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 to select different sets of USB functions available in mutually exclusive way selecting the active USB profile consisting of a specific set of functions with various capabilities and purposes su
236. om active mode When in power off mode TOBY L2 modules can be switched on by PWR_ON RESET_N or an RTC alarm When in power off mode TOBY L2 modules enter the not powered mode after removing VCC supply The modules automatically switch from active mode to low power idle mode whenever possible if power saving is enabled see sections 1 5 1 5 1 9 1 4 1 9 2 4 and u blox AT Commands Manual 3 AT UPSV The modules wake up from low power idle mode to active mode in the following events e Automatic periodic monitoring of the paging channel for the paging block reception according to network conditions see 1 5 1 5 e The connected USB host forces a remote wakeup of the module as USB device see 1 9 1 4 e Automatic periodic enable of the UART interface to receive send data with AT UPSV 1 see 1 9 2 4 e Data received over UART with HW flow control disabled and power saving enabled see 1 9 2 4 e RTS input set ON by the host DTE with HW flow control disabled and AT UPSV 2 see 1 9 2 4 e DTR input set ON by the host DTE with AT UPSV 3 see 1 9 2 4 e The connected SDIO device forces a wakeup of the module as SDIO host see 1 9 4 e A preset RTC alarm occurs see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 AT CALA System description Page 20 of 162 biox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Operating Mode Description Transition between operating modes Active Mode Module is switched on with application interfaces
237. on or Li Polymer battery pack with 470 Q NTC Various manufacturer C1 C4 uF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0603 10 16 V GRM188R71C105KA12 Murata C2 C6 O nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10 16 V GRM155R71C103KA01 Murata C3 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 1096 50 V GRM155R71H102KA01 Murata C5 330 uF Capacitor Tantalum D SIZE 6 3 V 45 mQ T520D337MO006ATEO045 KEMET C7 00 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10 16 V GRM155R61A104KA01 Murata C8 68 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 596 50 V GRM1555C1H680JA01 Murata C9 5 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 596 50 V GRM1555C1H150JA01 Murata C10 8 2 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 596 50 V GRM1555C1H8R2DZ01 Murata D1 Low Capacitance ESD Protection USBOOO2RP or USB0002DP AVX R1 R2 24 kQ Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W RC0402JR 0724KL Yageo Phycomp R3 3 3 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RC0402JR 073K3L Yageo Phycomp R4 1 0 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RC0402JR 071KOL Yageo Phycomp U1 Single Cell Li lon or Li Polymer Battery Charger IC L6924U STMicroelectronics Table 20 Suggested components for Li lon or Li Polymer battery charging application circuit UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 79 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 2 1 8 Guidelines for external battery charging and power path management circuit Application devices where both a permanent primary supply charging source e g 12 V and a rechargeable back up battery e g 3 7 V Li Pol are availab
238. on Application Note 14 for the complete description of the feature L u blox is extremely mindful of user privacy When a position is sent to the CellLocate server u blox is unable to track the SIM used or the specific device 1 15 12 Wi Fi integration L u blox short range communication Wi Fi modules integration is not available for MPCI L2 series modules L u blox short range communication Wi Fi modules integration is not supported by the TOBY L2 series modules 00 01 and 60 product versions Full access to u blox short range communication Wi Fi modules is available through a dedicated SDIO interface see sections 1 9 4 and 2 6 4 This means that combining a TOBY L2 series cellular module with a u blox short range communication module gives designers full access to the Wi Fi module directly via the cellular module so that a second interface connected to the Wi Fi module is not necessary AT commands via the AT interfaces of the cellular module UART USB allows a full control of the Wi Fi module from any host processor because Wi Fi control messages are relayed to the Wi Fi module via the dedicated SDIO interface for more details see the Wi Fi AT commands in the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 All the management software for Wi Fi module operations runs inside the cellular module in addition to those required for cellular only operation Wi Fi driver Web User Interface WebUI Connection Config Manager For more deta
239. on Board Primary Antenna Assembly Figure 48 Suggested schematic for antenna detection circuit on application board and diagnostic circuit on antennas assembly Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer C1 27 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 596 50 V GRM1555C1H270 Murata C2 C3 33 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 5 50 V GRM1555C1H330J Murata D1 Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection PESD0402 140 Tyco Electronics L1 L2 68 nH Multilayer Inductor 0402 SRF 1 GHz LQG15HS68NJO2 Murata R1 10 kQ Resistor 0402 1 0 063 W RK73H1ETTP1002F KOA Speer J1 J2 SMA Connector 50 Q Through Hole Jack SMA6251A1 3GT50G 50 Amphenol CA C5 22 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 5 25 V GRM1555C1H220 Murata L3 L4 68 nH Multilayer Inductor 0402 SRF 1 GHz LQG15HS68NJO2 Murata R2 R3 15 kQ Resistor for Diagnostic Various Manufacturers Table 29 Suggested components for antenna detection circuit on application board and diagnostic circuit on antennas assembly The antenna detection circuit and diagnostic circuit suggested in Figure 48 and Table 29 are explained here When antenna detection is forced by AT UANTR command ANT DET generates a DC current measuring the resistance R2 R3 from antenna connectors J1 J2 provided on the application board to GND DC blocking capacitors are needed at the ANT1 ANT2 pins C2 C3 and at the antenna radiating element C4 C5 to decouple the DC current generated by the ANT DET pin
240. onic processes ice ete FRU te A ipaq geesde 142 L3 7 c 143 4 1 Product certification approval Oovervleuw eene ener ener 143 4 2 US Federal Communications Commission notice ssssssssssssseem emnes 144 4 2 1 Safety warnings review the structure 144 4 22 Declaration Of COnTOFmmity sisi iet aries atat pateat pen pb on NR MEE ieee 144 E Se ee EE 145 4 3 Industry Canada note 145 4 3 1 Declaration of COntOnMity iiie ete beenden Ru eder tied een a eda Ee ue RR ddl ae cuneus 146 4 32 MoOdificatiolis ier prete tenete elt reta tke edere cu plata Rede nein exu hte 146 444 Ariatel certifICatlOn cedido dde ded ub Re dee eebe 148 4 5 R amp TTED and European Conformance CE mark 148 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Contents Page 6 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 4 6 Australia Regulatory Compliance Mark 149 5 Product testing oben Hm MD CIE M I E 150 5 1 u blox in series production Test 150 5 2 Test parameters for OEM manufacturer eene eren nennen 151 5 2 1 Go No go tests for integrated devices eee 151 5 22 RFf nctlorial tests trente i tritt dupla eege reta ubt Gode demus etu tus nd 151 ijr Gee 153 A Migration between TOBY L1 and TOBY L2 esses 153 DAMES uu tensa 153 A 2 Pin
241. or NTZS3151P ON Semi T2 NPN BJT Transistor BC847 Infineon C1 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 1096 16 V GRM155R71C104KA01 Murata Table 39 Components for connecting TOBY L2 modules to u blox 1 8 V GNSS receivers using V_INT as supply For additional guidelines regarding the design of applications with u blox 1 8 V GNSS receivers see the GNSS Implementation Application Note 14 and the Hardware Integration Manual of the u blox GNSS receivers UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 114 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Connection with u blox 3 0 V GNSS receivers Figure 64 shows an application circuit for connecting TOBY L2 cellular modules to a u blox 3 0 V GNSS receiver As the SDA and SCL pins of the TOBY L2 cellular module are not tolerant up to 3 0 V the connection to the related IC pins of the u blox 3 0 V GNSS receiver must be provided using a proper l C bus Bidirectional Voltage Translator with proper pull up resistors e g the TI TCA9406 additionally provides the partial power down feature so that the GNSS 3 0 V supply can be ramped up before the V_INT 1 8 V cellular supply As the GPIO3 pin of the TOBY L2 cellular module is not tolerant up to 3 0 V the connection to the related pin of the u blox 3 0 V GNSS receiver must be provided using a proper Unidirectional General Purpose Voltage Translator e g Tl SN74AVC2T245 which additionally provides the partial power dow
242. or TOBY L280 MPCI L280 modules i e the combined transmission line connector cable losses and radiating element gain must not exceed 4 3 dBi 850 MHz i e GSM 850 or UMTS FDD 5 or LTE FDD 5 band 3 4 dBi 1900 MHz i e GSM 1900 or UMTS FDD 2 or LTE FDD 2 band 10 8 dBi 2500 MHz i e LTE FDD 7 band for mobile and fixed or mobile operating configurations UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Approvals Page 144 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 4 2 3 Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by u blox could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Manufacturers of mobile or fixed devices incorporating the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules are authorized to use the FCC Grants of the TOBY L2 series modules for their own final products according to the conditions referenced in the certificates The FCC Label shall in the above case be visible from the outside or the host device shall bear a second label stating Contains FCC ID XPYTOBYL200 resp Contains FCC ID XPYTOBYL201 resp Contains FCC ID XPYTOBYL210 resp Contains FCC ID XPYTOBYL280 resp IMPORTANT Manufacturers of portable applications incorporating the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules are required to have their final product certified and apply for their own FCC Grant related to the specific portab
243. ormance specification Radio transmission and reception Part 2 Implementation Conformance Statement ICS 3GPP TS 36 523 2 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access E UTRA and Evolved Packet Core EPC User Equipment conformance specification Part 2 Implementation Conformance Statement ICS u blox End user test Application Note Docu No UBX 13001922 u blox Package Information Guide Docu No UBX 14001652 u blox Nested Design Application Note Docu No UBX 13002795 Some of the above documents can be downloaded from u blox web site http Awww u blox comy UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Related documents Page 160 of 162 biox Revision history Revision RO1 RO2 R03 R04 R05 RO6 RO7 ROS RO9 R10 R11 R12 Date 20 Dec 2013 21 Mar 2014 23 Jul 2014 30 Sep 2014 28 Nov 2014 28 Jan 2015 29 May 2015 21 Jul 2015 19 Aug 2015 30 Sep 2015 04 Nov 2015 26 Nov 2015 UBX 13004618 R12 Name SSes sses sses Ipah lpah sses sses sses sses sses sses sses Ipah TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Status Comments nitial release for TOBY L2 series nitial release including MPCI L2 series UART and GPIOs remarked as not supported by TOBY L2x0 00S Advance Information document status Updated MPCI L2 descriptions Updated USB description and design in including VUSB_DET pin previously RSVD Updated MPCI L2 th
244. own feature so that the DTE 3 0 V supply can be also ramped up before V INT 1 8 V supply UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 108 of 162 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual VP biox Providing the TXD RXD RTS and CTS lines only not using the complete V 24 link If the functionality of the DSR DCD RI and DTR lines is not required in or the lines are not available Connect the module DTR input line to GND using a 0 Q series resistor since the module requires DTR active Leave DSR DCD and RI lines of the module unconnected and floating If RS 232 compatible signal levels are needed the Maxim 13234E voltage level translator can be used This chip translates voltage levels from 1 8 V module side to the RS 232 standard If a 1 8 V Application Processor is used the circuit should be implemented as described in Figure 58 Application Processor 1 8V DTE TOBY L2 series 1 8V DCE TXD RXD RTS CTS DTR DSR RI DCD GND Figure 58 UART interface application circuit with partial V 24 link 5 wire in the DTE DCE serial communication 1 8V DTE If a 3 0 V Application Processor DTE is used then it is recommended to connect the 1 8 V UART interface of the module DCE by means of appropriate unidirectional voltage translators using the module V INT output as 1 8 V supply for the voltage translators on the module side as described in Figure 59 App
245. p 1 8 V open ported by 00 01 60 product versions drain for communication with u blox GNSS receivers and other I2C slave devices as an audio codec Externa See sec See sec Not sup SDIO in See sec See sec Not sup SDIO in See sec See sec Not sup SDIO in See sec See sec Not sup SDIO in See sec See sec Not sup SDIO in See sec See sec Not sup SDIO in See sec See sec Not sup See sec See sec Not sup S recei See sec See sec Not sup S seria See sec See sec Not sup See sec See sec Early Production Information S word pull up required ion 1 9 3 for functional description ion 2 6 3 for external circuit design in erface for communication with externa ion 1 9 4 for functional description ion 2 6 4 for external circuit design in erface for communication with externa ion 1 9 4 for functional description ion 2 6 4 for external circuit design in erface for communication with externa ion 1 9 4 for functional description ion 2 6 4 for external circuit design in erface for communication with externa ion 1 9 4 for functional description ion 2 6 4 for external circuit design in erface for communication with externa ion 1 9 4 for functional description ion 2 6 4 for external circuit design in erface for communication with externa ion 1 9 4 for functional description ion 2 6 4 for external circuit design in ions 2 7 and 2 8 for external
246. perate as LTE 3G 2G cellular modems i e as the data circuit terminating equipment DCE according to the ITU T V 24 Recommendation 8 A host application processor connected to the module through the UART interface represents the data terminal equipment DTE L UART signal names of TOBY L2 modules conform to the ITU T V 24 Recommendation 8 e g TXD line represents data transmitted by the DTE host processor output and received by the DCE module input The UART interface is controlled and operated with AT commands according to 3GPP TS 27 007 9 3GPP TS 27 005 10 3GPP TS 27 010 11 u blox AT commands L For the complete list of supported AT commands and their syntax see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 and in particular for the UART configuration see the IPR ICF AFC amp K NQ UPSV AT commands Flow control handshakes are supported by the UART interface and can be set by appropriate AT commands see u blox AT Commands Manual 3 amp K IFC Q AT commands hardware flow control over the RTS CTS lines software flow control XON XOFF or none flow control L Hardware flow control is enabled by default L Software flow control is not supported by 00 01 and 60 module product versions The one shot autobauding is supported the automatic baud rate detection is performed only once at module start up After the detection the module works at the detected baud rate and the baud rate can only be changed by AT
247. perature dependent For example V_BCKP current consumption at the maximum operating temperature can be higher than the typical value at 25 C specified in the Input characteristics of Supply Power pins table in the TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 If V BCKP is left unconnected and the module main supply is not applied to the VCC pins the RTC is supplied from the bypass capacitor mounted inside the module However this capacitor is not able to provide a long buffering time within few milliseconds the voltage on V_BCKP will go below the valid range 1 4 V min This has no impact on cellular connectivity as all the module functionalities do not rely on date and time setting UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 29 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 5 3 Generic digital interfaces supply output V INT L The generic digital interfaces supply V_INT pin is not available on MPCI L2 series modules The V INT output pin of the TOBY L2 series modules is connected to an internal 1 8 V supply with current capability specified in the TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 This supply is internally generated by a switching step down regulator integrated in the Power Management Unit and it is internally used to source the generic digital O interfaces of the TOBY L2 module as described in Figure 12 The output of this regulator is enabled when the module is switched on and it is disabled
248. porarily enabled to send data If the DTE send data with HW flow control disabled the first character sent causes the UART and module wake up after 5 ms recognition of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the complete wake up see the following subsection wake up via data reception The module automatically enters the low power idle mode whenever possible but it wakes up to active mode according to the UART periodic wake up so that the module cyclically enters the low power idle mode and the active mode Additionally the module wakes up to active mode according to any required activity related to the network e g for the periodic paging reception described in section 1 5 1 5 or for any other required RF Tx Rx or any other required activity related to module functions interfaces including the UART itself When the UART interface is enabled data can be received When a character is received it forces the UART interface to stay enabled for a longer time and it forces the module to stay in the active mode for a longer time according to the timeout configured by the second parameter of the UPSV AT command The timeout can be set from 40 2G frames i e 40 x 4 615 ms 184 ms up to 65000 2G frames i e 65000 x 4 615 ms 300 s Default value is 2000 2G frames i e 2000 x 4 615 ms 9 2 s Every subsequent character received during the active mode resets and restarts the timer hence the active mode duration can be extended indef
249. ps voltage during See Supply Power pins section in the TOBY L2 Data below the extended operating range minimum limit normal operation Sheet 1 or in the MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 VCC or 3 3Vaux Support with adequate margin the highest averaged The maximum average current consumption can be average current current consumption value in connected mode greater than the specified value according to the actual conditions specified for VCC in TOBY L2 Data Sheet 1 antenna mismatching temperature and supply voltage or specified for 3 3Vaux in MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 Sections 1 5 1 2 1 5 1 3 and 1 5 1 4 describe current consumption profiles in 2G 3G and LTE connected mode VCC or 3 3Vaux Support with margin the highest peak current The specified maximum peak of current consumption peak current consumption value in 2G connected mode conditions occurs during GSM single transmit slot in 850 900 MHz specified for VCC in TOBY L2 Data Sheet 1 or connected mode in case of mismatched antenna specified for 3 3Vaux in MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 Section 1 5 1 2 describes 2G Tx peak pulse current VCC or 3 3Vaux Lower than 400 mV Supply voltage drop values greater than recommended voltage drop during during 2G TDMA transmission slots directly affect the RF 2G Tx slots compliance with applicable certification schemes Figure 5 describes supply voltage drop during 2G Tx slots VCC or 3 3Vaux Noise in the supply has to be minimized High supply voltage ripple val
250. r PA 710 A PA 711 A PCS 06 A Product Name Warrior Warrior Il Havok Table 26 Examples of internal surface mount antennas TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Description GSM WCDMA LTE SMD Antenna 698 960 MHz 1710 40 0 x 6 0 x 5 0 mm 2170 MHz 2300 2400 MHz 2490 2690 MHz GSM WCDMA LTE SMD Antenna Pairs with the Taoglas PA 710 A Warrior for LTE MIMO applications 698 960 MHz 1710 40 0 x 6 0 x 5 0 mm 2170 MHz 2300 2400 MHz 2490 2690 MHz GSM WCDMA LTE SMD Antenna 698 960 MHz 1710 42 0 x 10 0 x 3 0 mm 2170 MHz 2500 2690 MHz Table 27 lists some examples of possible internal off board PCB type antennas with cable and connector Manufacturer Taoglas Taoglas Taoglas Ethertronics EAD Part Number FXUB63 07 0150C FXUB66 07 0150C FXUB70 A 07 C 001 5001537 FSQS35241 UF 10 Product Name Maximus Prestta SQ7 Description GSM WCD A LTE PCB Antenna with cable and UEL 698 960 MHz 1575 42 MHz 1710 2170 MHz 2400 2690 MHz 96 0 x 21 0 mm GSM WCD 698 960 MHz 1390 2400 2700 120 2 x 50 4 mm GSM WCDMA LTE A LTE PCB Antenna with cable and UEL 1435 MHz 1575 42 MHz 1710 2170 MHz Hz 3400 3600 MHz 4800 6000 MHz PCB MIMO Antenna with cables and U FL 698 960 MHz 1575 42 MHz 1710 2170 MHz 2400 2690 MHz 182 2x 21 2 mm GSM WCDMA LTE 704 960 MHz 1710 80 0 x 18 0
251. r with appropriate pull up resistors connected to the 1 8 V GNSS supply enabled after the V INT supply of the I C pins of the TOBY L2 cellular module GPIO3 pin is directly connected to the TxD1 pin of the u blox 1 8 V GNSS receiver to provide GNSS data ready function GPIO2 pin is connected to the shutdown input pin SHDNn of the LDO regulators providing the 1 8 V supply rail for the u blox 1 8 V GNSS receiver implementing the GNSS enable function with appropriate pull down resistor mounted on GPIO2 line to avoid an improper switch on of the u blox GNSS receiver The V BCKP output of the cellular module is connected to the V BCKP input pin of the GNSS receiver to provide the supply for the GNSS RTC and backup RAM when the VCC supply of the cellular module is within its operating range and the VCC supply of the GNSS receiver is disabled This enables the u blox GNSS receiver to recover from a power breakdown with either a hot start or a warm start depending on the duration of the GNSS VCC outage and to maintain the configuration settings saved in the backup RAM u blox GNSS 1 8 V receiver TOBY L2 series except 00 01 60 02 versions V BCKP 4 E V_BCKP 1v8 1v8 1v8 e SDA2 GNSSLDO Regulator VMAIN GNSS supply enabled SHDNn v GND R3 Uu L SCL2 GNSS data ready TxD1 kon K cP103 GPIO2
252. r Li Pol batteries connected to the VCC pins should meet the following prerequisites to comply with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 7 Maximum pulse and DC discharge current the rechargeable Li lon battery with its related output circuit connected to the VCC pins must be capable of delivering a pulse current as the maximum peak current consumption during Tx burst at maximum Tx power specified in TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 and must be capable of extensively delivering a DC current as the maximum average current consumption specified in TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 The maximum discharge current is not always reported in battery data sheets but the maximum DC discharge current is typically almost equal to the battery capacity in Amp hours divided by 1 hour DC series resistance the rechargeable Li lon battery with its output circuit must be capable of avoiding a VCC voltage drop below the operating range summarized in Table 7 during transmit bursts UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 76 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 2 1 5 Guidelines for VCC supply circuit design using a primary disposable battery The characteristics of a primary non rechargeable battery connected to VCC pins should meet the following prerequisites to comply with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 7 Maximum pulse and DC discharge current the non rechargeable battery with
253. r sent by the DTE is the wake up character as a consequence the DCE module UART is disabled when the timeout from last data received expires 2000 frames without data reception as the default case UART OFF DCE UART is enabled for 2000 GSM frames 9 2 s l ON gt time TXD put 1 Wake up time 5 ms OFF ON Wake up character time Not recognized by DCE Figure 24 Wake up via data reception without further communication UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 53 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Figure 25 shows the case where in addition to the wake up character further valid characters are sent The wake up character wakes up the module UART The other characters must be sent after the wake up time of 5 ms If this condition is satisfied the module DCE recognizes characters The module will disable the UART after 2000 GSM frames from the latest data reception UART OFF DCE UART is enabled for 2000 GSM frames 9 2s q after the last data received ge 1 ON j time TXD input i Wake up time 5 ms OFF ON Wake up character Valid characters time Not recognized by DCE Recognized by DCE Figure 25 Wake up via data reception with further communication C8 The wake up via data reception feature cannot be disabled L In command mode if autobauding is enabled and HW flow control is not implemented
254. rcuit has to be implemented and configured according to the particular external digital audio device or audio codec used and according to the application requirements TOBY L2 series except 00 01 60 versions 1V8 VINE o o e U e o Audio Codec C1 C2 C3 R1 R2 R3 VDD UES gall ll IRQn MICBIAS CT c4 RS R4 Microphone SDA EA A1 SDA Eun Connector MIC SCLER sc MICLP e e e e cs Eu 4 H 125_TXD EE Kl sn DS eech M at J1 12S_RXD EA spouT e C12 C11 C8 C7 ER GE 12S_CLK BCLK MICGND S DUT Speaker SPK EE rc ik Connector DS WA EMI3 OUTP OE e e e EMI4 GPIO6 n MCLK BUIN 8 8 X J2 GND EE GND C14 C13 C10 C9 ul L 1 M He ds Figure 66 lS interface application circuit with an external audio codec to provide voice capability UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 119 of 162 Le Le biox Reference C1 C2 C4 C5 C6 C3 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 D1 D2 EMI1 EMI2 EMI3 EMIA Ji J2 MIC R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 SPK U1 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Description 00 nF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0402 1096 10V uF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0402 1
255. rcuitry without adequate filtering for digital noise V INT can only be used as an output do not connect any external supply source on V INT ESD sensitivity rating of the V INT supply pin is 1 kV Human Body Model according to JESD22 A1 14 Higher protection level could be required if the line is externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection e g EPCOS CAO5PAS14THSG varistor array close to the accessible point It is recommended to provide direct access to the V INT pin on the application board by means of an accessible test point directly connected to the V INT pin 2 2 3 2 Guidelines for V INT layout design V INT supply output is generated by an integrated switching step down converter Because of this it can be a source of noise avoid coupling with sensitive signals UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 85 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 3 System functions interfaces 2 3 1 Module power on PWR ON L The PWR_ON input pin is not available on MPCI L2 series modules 2 3 1 1 Guidelines for PWR_ON circuit design TOBY L2 series PWR_ON input is equipped with an internal active pull up resistor to the VCC module supply as described in Figure 41 an external pull up resistor is not required and should not be provided If connecting the PWR ON input to a push button the pin will be externally accessible on the application device
256. re tests or measurements of the module RF performance or tests over analog and digital interfaces in their production test However an OEM manufacturer should focus on Module assembly on the device it should be verified that o Soldering and handling process did not damage the module components o All module pins are well soldered on device board o There are no short circuits between pins Component assembly on the device it should be verified that o Communication with host controller can be established o The interfaces between module and device are working o Overall RF performance test of the device including antenna Dedicated tests can be implemented to check the device For example the measurement of module current consumption when set in a specified status can detect a short circuit if compared with a Golden Device result In addition module AT commands can be used to perform functional tests communication with host controller check SIM interface GPIOs etc and to perform RF performance tests see the following two sections for details 5 2 1 Go No go tests for integrated devices A Go No go test is typically to compare the signal quality with a Golden Device in a location with excellent network coverage and known signal quality This test should be performed after data connection has been established AT CSQ is the typical AT command used to check signal quality in term of RSSI See the u blox AT Commands Manual 3
257. ream 1 Tx 2 Rx 2 Antenna Antenna Data Stream 2 Figure 18 Description of the LTE Down Link MIMO 2 x 2 radio technology supported by TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules support the LTE MIMO 2 x 2 radio technology in the Down Link path only from the base station to the module the ANT1 port is the only one RF interface that is used by the module to transmit the RF signal in the Up Link path from the module to the base station UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 36 of 162 A ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 7 1 4 Antenna RF interfaces requirements Table 8 Table 9 and Table 10 summarize the requirements for the antennas RF interfaces ANT1 ANT2 See section 2 4 1 for suggestions to properly design antennas circuits compliant with these requirements The antenna circuits affect the RF compliance of the device integrating TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules with applicable required certification schemes for more details see section 4 Compliance is guaranteed if the antenna RF interfaces ANT1 ANT2 requirements summarized in Table 8 Table 9 and Table 10 are fulfilled Item Requirements Remarks Impedance 50 Q nominal characteristic impedance The impedance of the antenna RF connection must match the 50 Q impedance of the ANT1 port Frequency Range See the TOBY L2 series Data Sheet
258. red certification schemes See section 1 7 for functional description requirements See section 2 4 for external circuit design in ANT2 U FL Secondary antenna Rx only for MIMO 2x2 and Rx diversity 50 Q nominal characteristic impedance Antenna circuit affects the RF performance and compliance of the device integrating the module with applicable required certification schemes See section 1 7 for functional description requirements See section 2 4 for external circuit design in SIM UIM_PWR 8 O SIM supply output UIM PWR 1 8 V 3 V automatically generated according to the connected SIM type See section 1 8 for functional description See section 2 5 for external circuit design in UIM_DATA 10 VO SIM data Data input output for 1 8 V 3 V SI Internal 4 7 kQ pull up to UIM_PWR See section 1 8 for functional description See section 2 5 for external circuit design in UIM_CLK 12 O SIM clock 3 25 MHz clock output for 1 8 V 3 V SIM See section 1 8 for functional description See section 2 5 for external circuit design in UIM RESET 14 O SIM reset Reset output for 1 8 V 3 V SIM See section 1 8 for functional description See section 2 5 for external circuit design in UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 18 of 162 BP biox Function Pin Name USB USB_D USB_D Specific LED_WWAN Signals W_DISABLE Not NC Connected Pin No 1 0 36 yo 38 Vo 42 O
259. rence design because it provides antennas with conductive amp insulating surfaces The test is applicable only to equipment providing antennas with conductive surface Air Discharge Enclosure port Not Applicable Test not applicable to the u blox reference design at insulating surfaces because it does not provide an enclosure surface The test is applicable only to equipment providing insulating enclosure surface Antenna ports 8 kV 8 kV Test applicable to u blox reference design because it provides antennas with conductive amp insulating surfaces The test is applicable only to equipment providing antennas with insulating surface Table 49 Enclosure ESD immunity level of u blox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules reference designs L TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 reference design implement all the ESD precautions described in section 2 15 3 2 15 3 ESD application circuits The application circuits described in this section are recommended and should be implemented in the device integrating TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules according to the application device classification see ETSI EN 301 489 1 24 to satisfy the requirements for ESD immunity test summarized in Table 48 Antenna interface The ANT1 and ANT2 ports of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules provide ESD immunity up to 4 kV for direct Contact Discharge and up to 8 kV for Air Discharge no further precaution to ESD immunity test is needed as implemented in the EMC ESD appro
260. rential Signal integrity may be degraded if PCB layout is not optimal especially when the USB signaling lines are very long Use the following general routing guidelines to minimize signal quality problems e Route USB D USB D lines as a differential pair e Route USB D USB D lines as short as possible e Ensure the differential characteristic impedance Z is as close as possible to 90 Q e Ensure the common mode characteristic impedance Z is as close as possible to 30 Q e Consider design rules for USB D USB D similar to RF transmission lines being them coupled differential micro strip or buried stripline avoid any stubs abrupt change of layout and route on clear PCB area Figure 54 and Figure 55 provide two examples of coplanar waveguide designs with differential characteristic impedance close to 90 O and common mode characteristic impedance close to 30 Q The first transmission line can be implemented in case of 4 layer PCB stack up herein described the second transmission line can be implemented in case of 2 layer PCB stack up herein described 400 um 350um A00 um 250 um 400 um L1 Copper 35 um FR 4 dielectric 270 um L2 Copper 35 um FR 4 dielectric 760 um L3 Copper 35 um FR 4 dielectric 270 um L4 Copper 35 um Figure 54 Example of USB line design with Z close to 90 Q and Z close to 30 Q for the described 4 layer board layup 410um 240 um A10 um 740um 410 um L1 Copper E 35 um FR 4 dielectric 1510
261. rsus time during a 3G connection TX and RX continuously enabled UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 25 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 5 1 4 VCC or 3 3Vaux current consumption in LTE connected mode During an LTE connection the module can transmit and receive continuously due to the Frequency Division Duplex FDD mode of operation used in LTE radio access technology The current consumption depends on output RF power which is always regulated by the network the current base station sending power control commands to the module These power control commands are logically divided into a slot of 0 5 ms time length of one Resource Block thus the rate of power change can reach a maximum rate of 2 kHz The current consumption profile is similar to that in 3G radio access technology Unlike the 2G connection mode which uses the TDMA mode of operation there are no high current peaks since transmission and reception are continuously enabled in FDD In the worst scenario corresponding to a continuous transmission and reception at maximum output power approximately 250 mW or 24 dBm the average current drawn by the module at the VCC pins is considerable see the Current consumption section in TOBY L2 Data Sheet 1 or in MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 At the lowest output RF power approximately 0 01 uW or 50 dBm the current drawn by the internal power amplifier i
262. s strongly reduced and the total current drawn by the module at the VCC pins is due to baseband processing and transceiver activity Figure 8 shows an example of the module current consumption profile versus time in LTE connected mode Detailed current consumption values can be found in TOBY L2 Data Sheet 1 and in MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 Current mA 700 wd rier eg LL e CS eg eroe pee ON i Lo f 600 500 Current consumption value depends on TX power and 400 actual antenna load 300 200 100 Pa 1 Slot Time 1 Resource Block ms 0 5 ms 1 LTE Radio Frame 10 ms Figure 8 VCC or 3 3Vaux current consumption profile versus time during LTE connection TX and RX continuously enabled UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 26 of 162 Qo OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 5 1 5 VCC or 3 3Vaux current consumption in cyclic idle active mode power saving enabled The power saving configuration is by default disabled but it can be enabled using the AT UPSV command see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 When power saving is enabled the module automatically enters the low power idle mode whenever possible reducing current consumption During low power idle mode the module processor runs with 32 kHz reference clock frequency When the power saving configuration is enabled and the module is registered or attached to a network the module automatically enters
263. s are required and must be connected to the module SIM interface Removable SIM cards are suitable for applications requiring a change of SIM card during the product lifetime VVUVVVV A SIM card holder can have 6 or 8 positions if a mechanical card presence detector is not provided or it can have 6 2 or 8 2 positions if two additional pins relative to the normally open mechanical switch integrated in the SIM connector for the mechanical card presence detection are provided Select a SIM connector providing 6 2 or 8 2 positions if the optional SIM detection feature not available on MPCI L2 series is required by the custom application otherwise a connector without integrated mechanical presence switch can be selected Solderable UICC SIM chip contact mapping M2M UICC Form Factor is defined by ETSI TS 102 671 as Case Pin 8 UICC Contact C1 VCC Supply gt It must be connected to VSIM or UIM_PWR Case Pin 7 UICC Contact C2 RST Reset gt It must be connected to SIM_RST or UIM_RESET Case Pin 6 UICC Contact C3 CLK Clock gt It must be connected to SIM_CLK or UIM_CLK Case Pin 5 UICC Contact C4 AUX1 Aux contact gt It must be left not connected Case Pin 1 UICC Contact C5 GND Ground gt It must be connected to GND Case Pin 2 UICC Contact C6 VPP Progr supply gt It must be connected to VSIM or UIM_PWR Case Pin 3 UICC Contact C7 I O Data I O gt It must be connected to SIM IO or UIM DATA Case Pin 4 UICC Co
264. s is 1 kV HBM according to JESD22 A114 Higher protection level can be required if the line is externally accessible on the application board e g if an accessible push button is directly connected to the RESET_N or PERST pin and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection e g EPCOS CAO5PAS14THSG varistor close to accessible point An open drain output is suitable to drive the RESET_N and PERST inputs from an application processor as they are equipped with an internal pull up to VCC supply and to the 3 3 V rail respectively as described in Figure 42 A compatible push pull output of an application processor can also be used In any case take care to set the proper level in all the possible scenarios to avoid an inappropriate module reset switch on or switch off LS TOBY L2 series Application TOBY L2 series Processor vcc VCC Power on 50 kO Ceen 50 kQ push button m TP Output TP oO O e RESET N RESET N EES n MPCI L2 series Application MPCI L2 series Processor 3v3 3V3 Open Power on 45 kQ Drain 45 kO push button Output o o e PERST PERST X ESD n Figure 42 RESET N and PERST application circuits using a push button and an open drain output of an application processor Reference ESD Description Varistor for ESD protection Remarks CT0402S14AHSG EPCOS Table 24 Example of ESD protection component for the RESET_N and PERST application
265. s nn nnns 89 2 4 2 Antenna detection interface ANT DEI 97 2 5 SIMLiriterface cette to ettet teste eee impune eege ee 99 2 5 1 Guidelines for SIM circuit design sirisser isien aiea ae arra AEA EEEE 99 2 5 2 Guidelines tor SIM layoUt design ii c nona E E E AEE 105 2 6 Data communication interfaces sssssssssssssssseee ee em nennen ee n nnns sls e nennen nnne s sene en nnns 106 2 6 1 Universal Serial Bus USB 106 2 6 2 Asynchronous serial interface ART 108 263 DDC APE Inet aCe rte edente etse eaae eee A cea ceste as 112 2 6 4 Secure Digital Input Output interface Gi 116 2 7 Audo interface aeos rites eee nbus m d EI a mE E DRM mU Ud 118 2 7 1 Digital audio interface eene rre nnns 118 2 8 General Purpose nputdCOutput eene ener nennen nennen nennen 122 2 9 Mini PCle specific signals W_DISABLE LED_WWANB sssssssssH nnne 123 2 10 Reserved pilis RS VID ee 124 2 11 Mod le Place EE 125 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Contents Page 5 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 12 TOBY L2 series module footprint and paste mask 126 2 13 MPCI L2 series module installation eene nennen 127 2 14 Thermal guidelines sssssssssseesssse eee ene enne nennen nnne nnne 129 2 15 ESD guideline m o ERE awe E Ded ne uat di NS UTE 130 215 1 ESD IMMUNITY test E 130 2 15 2 ESD immunity test of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series reference designs
266. series System Integration Manual Figure 32 and Table 15 show an example of a high reliability power supply circuit where the module VCC or 3 3Vaux input is supplied by a step down switching regulator capable of delivering maximum current with low output ripple and with fixed switching frequency in PWM mode operation greater than 1 MHz uw L e TOBY L2 series 4 VIN VCC R1 5 RUN gp H e e e VCC 9 2 C6 vcc VC BOOST PTT e n L 107 gr SW 5 C7 C8 7 pg U1 Di R4 R2 R3 ES 6 sync rp 8 c1 C2 C3 C4 C5 GND 11 R5 em GND 12V MPCI L2 series e e 4 VIN 3 3Vaux R1 3 RUN Bp H e e e o 3 3Vaux A P I yc Boost Z C6 AER 3 3Vaux 10 3 ol 3 3Vaux RT SW V e dE LN C7 C8 3 3Vaux eg VI DI se R2 R3 i 6 SYNC rp 8 o c1 C2 C3 C4 C5 GND 11 R5 GND Figure 32 Example of high reliability VCC and 3 3Vaux supply application circuit using a step down regulator Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer C1 10 uF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 5750 1596 50 V C5750X7R1H106MB TDK C2 10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10 16 V GRM155R71C103KA01 Murata C3 680 pF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 1096 16 V GRM155R71H681KA01 Murata
267. series PROCESSOR TOBY L2 series VBUS ES VUSB_DET vBUS Hi ES VUSB_DET D C USB D D Bl USB D D C USB_D D EE USB_D D1 Se GND GND GND El T EN GND USB DEVICE USB HOST CONNECTOR g PROCESSOR MPCI L2 series MPCI L2 series VBUS C vBUS BIN D EJ USB_D D EJ usb p D C i EJ USB_D D Bil EJ usb p D1 D2 GND EI GND GND Ml t EN cND Figure 53 USB Interface application circuits Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer D1 D2 Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection PESD0402 140 Tyco Electronics Table 34 Component for USB application circuits UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 106 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual L If the USB interface pins are not used they can be left unconnected on the application board but it is recommended providing accessible test points directly connected to USB_D and USB_D pins 2 6 1 2 Guidelines for USB layout design The USB D USB D lines require accurate layout design to achieve reliable signaling at the high speed data rate up to 480 Mb s supported by the USB serial interface The characteristic impedance of the USB D USB D lines is specified by the Universal Serial Bus Revision 2 0 specification 7 The most important parameter is the differential characteristic impedance applicable for the odd mode electromagnetic field which should be as close as possible to 90 Q diffe
268. since they are considered to be a port as defined in ETSI EN 301 489 1 24 Depending on applicability to satisfy ESD immunity test requirements according to ESD category level all the module pins that are externally accessible should be protected up to 4 kV for direct Contact Discharge and up to 8 kV for Air Discharge applied to the enclosure surface The maximum ESD sensitivity rating of all the other pins of the module is 1 kV Human Body Model according to JESD22 A114 Higher protection level could be required if the relative pin is externally accessible on the application board The following precautions are suggested to achieve higher protection level USB interface a very low capacitance i e less or equal to 1 pF ESD protection device e g Tyco Electronics PESD0402 140 ESD protection device should be mounted on the USB Dr and USB D lines close to the accessible points i e close to the USB connector Other pins a general purpose ESD protection device e g EPCOS CAO5PAS14THSG varistor array or EPCOS CT0402S14AHSG varistor should be mounted on the related line close to accessible point UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 132 of 162 biox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 16 Schematic for TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series module integration 2 16 1 Schematic for TOBY L2 module 00 product version Figure 75 is an example of a schematic diagram where a TOBY L2 cellular module
269. slot slot slot slot slot slot slot slot slot slot slot GSM frame GSM frame Time ms 4 615 ms 4 615 ms 1 frame 8 slots 1 frame 8 slots Figure 5 VCC or 3 3Vaux voltage profile versus time during a 2G single slot call 1 TX slot 1 RX slot UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 23 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual When a GPRS connection is established more than one slot can be used to transmit and or more than one slot can be used to receive The transmitted power depends on network conditions which set the peak current consumption but following the 3GPP specifications the maximum Tx RF power is reduced if more than one slot is used to transmit so the maximum peak of current is not as high as can be in case of a 2G single slot call The multi slot transmission power can be further reduced by configuring the actual Multi Slot Power Reduction profile with the dedicated AT command AT UDCONF 40 see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 This command is not supported by 00 01 and 60 product versions If the module transmits in GPRS class 12 in the 850 or 900 MHz bands at the maximum RF power control level the current consumption can reach a quite high peak but lower than the one achievable in 2G single slot mode This happens for 2 307 ms width of the 4 transmit slots bursts with a periodicity of 4 615 ms width of 1 frame 8 slots bursts so with a 1 2 dut
270. stant periods for more details see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 60 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 15 4 IP modes of operation IP modes of operation refer to the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules configuration related to the network IP termination and network interfaces settings in general IP modes of operation are the following Bridge mode In bridge mode the module acts as a cellular modem dongle connected to the host over serial interface The IP termination of the network is placed on the host IP stack The module is configured as a bridge which means the network IP address is assigned to the host host IP termination Router mode In router mode the module acts as a cellular modem router which means the IP termination of the network is placed on the internal IP stack of the module on target IP termination In particular in this configuration the application processor belongs to a private network and is not aware of the mobile connectivity setup of the module For more details about IP modes of operation see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 1 15 5 Dual stack IPvA IPv6 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series support both Internet Protocol version 4 and Internet Protocol version 6 in parallel For more details about dual stack IPv4 IPv6 see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 1 15 6 TCP IP and UDP IP L Embedded TCP IP a
271. t The conformity assessment procedure for the modules referred to in Article 10 and detailed in Annex IV of Directive 1999 5 EC has been followed with the involvement of the following Notified Body number 1588 Thus the following marking is included in the product C 1588 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Approvals Page 148 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 4 6 Australia Regulatory Compliance Mark TOBY L210 MPCI L210 TOBY L280 and MPCI L280 modules are compliant with the Standards made by the Australian Communications and Media Authority ACMA under Section 376 of the Telecommunications Act 1997 Modules are compliant with the following list of standards AS CA S042 1 2011 Requirements for connection to an air interface of a Telecommunications Network Part 1 AS ACIF S042 3 2005 Requirements for connection to an air interface of a Telecommunications Network Part 3 AS CA S042 4 201 1 Requirements for connection to an air interface of a Telecommunications Network Part 4 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Approvals Page 149 of 162 Qo Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 5 Product testing 5 1 u blox in series production test u blox focuses on high quality for its products All units produced are fully tested automatically in production line Stringent quality control process has been implemented in the production line De
272. t DTE and Data Circuit terminating Equipment DCE http www itu int rec T REC V 24 200002 l en 3GPP TS 27 007 AT command set for User Equipment UE 3GPP TS 27 005 Use of Data Terminal Equipment Data Circuit terminating Equipment DTE DCE interface for Short Message Service SMS and Cell Broadcast Service CBS 3GPP TS 27 010 Terminal Equipment to User Equipment TE UE multiplexer protocol u blox Mux Implementation Application Note Docu No UBX 13001887 l C bus specification and user manual Rev 5 9 October 2012 NXP Semiconductors http www nxp com documents user manual UM 1 0204 pdf u blox GNSS Implementation Application Note Docu No UBX 13001849 u blox Wi Fi Cellular Integration Application Note Docu No UBX 14003264 PCI Express Mini Card Electromechanical Specification Revision 2 0 April 21 2012 3GPP TS 26 267 eCall Data Transfer In band modem solution General description BS EN 16062 2011 Intelligent transport systems eSafety eCall high level application requirements ETSI TS 122 101 Service aspects Service principles 3GPP TS 22 101 u blox eCall ERA GLONASS Application Note Docu No UBX 13001924 SIM Access Profile Interoperability Specification http Avww bluetooth org GSM Association TS 09 Battery Life Measurement and Current Consumption Technique http www gsma com newsroom wp content uploads 2013 09 TS 09 v7 6 pdf CENELEC EN 61000 4 2 2001 Electromagnetic compatibility E
273. t by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive data otherwise data is lost 3 Disabled AT amp KO ON or OFF OFF The first character sent by the DTE is lost by the module but after 5 ms the UART and the module are woken up Recognition of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the UART module complete wake up i e after 5 ms Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive data otherwise data is lost m Table 12 UART and power saving summary AT UPSV 0 power saving disabled fixed active mode The module does not enter low power idle mode and the UART interface is enabled data can be sent and received the CTS line is always held in the ON state after UART initialization This is the default configuration AT UPSV 1 power saving enabled cyclic idle active mode When the AT UPSV 1 command is issued by the DTE the UART is disabled after the timeout set by the second parameter of the UPSV AT command for more details see u blox AT commands Manual 3 Afterwards the UART is enabled again and the module does not enter low power idle mode as following Periodically for paging reception see section 1 5 1 5 or other activities to temporarily receive or send data over the UART e g data buffered by the DTE with HW flow control enabled will be correctly received If the module needs to transmit some data e g URC the UART is tem
274. t for antenna RF circuits on application board UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 93 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Guidelines for RF termination design RF terminations must provide a characteristic impedance of 50 Q as well as the RF transmission lines up to the RF terminations themselves to match the characteristic impedance of the ANT1 ANT2 ports of the modules However real antennas do not have perfect 50 Q load on all the supported frequency bands Therefore to reduce as much as possible performance degradation due to antennas mismatch RF terminations must provide optimal return loss or V S W R figure over all the operating frequencies as summarized in Table 8 and Table 9 If external antennas are used the antenna connectors represent the RF termination on the PCB Use suitable 50 Q connectors providing proper PCB to RF cable transition Strictly follow the connector manufacturer s recommended layout for example o SMA Pin Through Hole connectors require GND keep out i e clearance a void area on all the layers around the central pin up to annular pads of the four GND posts as shown in Figure 47 o UEL surface mounted connectors require no conductive traces i e clearance a void area in the area below the connector between the GND land pads Cut out the GND layer under RF connectors and close to buried vias to remove stray capacitance and thus keep t
275. t interface SDIO DO SDIO D1 SDIO D2 SDIO D3 SDIO CLK SDIO CMD designed to communicate with an external u blox short range Wi Fi module the TOBY L2 cellular module acts as an SDIO host controller which can communicate over the SDIO bus with a compatible u blox short range Wi Fi module acting as SDIO device The SDIO interface is the only one interface of TOBY L2 series modules dedicated for communication between the u blox cellular module and the u blox short range Wi Fi module The AT commands interface is not available on the SDIO interface of TOBY L2 series modules The SDIO interface supports 50 MHz bus clock frequency which allows a data throughput of 200 Mb s Combining a u blox cellular module with a u blox short range communication module gives designers full access to the Wi Fi module directly via the cellular module so that a second interface connected to the Wi Fi module is not necessary AT commands via the AT interfaces of the cellular module UART USB allows a full control of the Wi Fi module from any host processor because Wi Fi control messages are relayed to the Wi Fi module via the dedicated SDIO interface for more details see the Wi Fi AT commands in the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 u blox has implemented special features in the cellular modules to ease the design effort for the integration of a u blox cellular module with a u blox short range Wi Fi module to provide Router functionality for more details see the Wi
276. tach is not performed L It is highly recommended to avoid an abrupt hardware reset of the module by forcing a low level on the RESET_N or PERST input during modules normal operation the RESET_N or PERST line should be set low only if reset or shutdown via AT commands fails or if the module does not provide a reply to a specific AT command after a time period longer than the one defined in the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 As described in Figure 17 the RESET_N and PERST input pins are equipped with an internal pull up to the VCC supply in the TOBY L2 series and to the 3 3 V in the MPCI L2 series TOBY L2 series m Power Baseband Management Processor 50k RESET N KE 9 Reset Reset vcc MPCI L2 series w w lt Power Baseband Management Processor PERST KEES 9 gt Reset Ltb Reset Figure 17 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series RESET_N and PERST input equivalent circuit description Le For more electrical characteristics details see TOBY L2 Data Sheet 1 and MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 1 6 4 Module configuration selection by host processor L The HOST_SELECTO and HOST_SELECT1 pins are not available on MPCI L2 series modules L The selection of the module configuration by the host application processor over the HOST_SELECTO and HOST_SELECT1 pins is not supported by
277. tch on of the V INT supply of DDC pins to avoid latch up of circuits and let a proper boot of the module The signal shape is defined by the values of the pull up resistors and the bus capacitance Long wires on the bus will increase the capacitance If the bus capacitance is increased use pull up resistors with nominal resistance value lower than 4 7 kQ to match the I C bus specifications 13 regarding rise and fall times of the signals L Capacitance and series resistance must be limited on the bus to match the I C specifications 1 0 us is the maximum allowed rise time on the SCL and SDA lines route connections as short as possible L If the pins are not used as DDC bus interface they can be left unconnected L ESD sensitivity rating of the DDC l C pins is 1 kV Human Body Model according to JESD22 A114 Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection e g EPCOS CAO5P4S14THSG varistor array close to accessible points UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 112 of 162 biox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Connection with u blox 1 8 V GNSS receivers Figure 62 shows an application circuit for connecting TOBY L2 cellular modules to a u blox 1 8 V GNSS receiver SDA SCL pins of the TOBY L2 cellular module are directly connected to the relative l C pins of the u blox 1 8 V GNSS receive
278. te the cleaning step after the soldering UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Handling and soldering Page 141 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 3 3 5 Repeated reflow soldering Only a single reflow soldering process is encouraged for boards with a module populated on it 3 3 6 Wave soldering Boards with combined through hole technology THT components and surface mount technology SMT devices require wave soldering to solder the THT components Only a single wave soldering process is encouraged for boards populated with the modules 3 3 7 Hand soldering Hand soldering is not recommended 3 3 8 Rework Rework is not recommended L Never attempt a rework on the module itself e g replacing individual components Such actions immediately terminate the warranty 3 3 9 Conformal coating Certain applications employ a conformal coating of the PCB using HumiSeal or other related coating products These materials affect the HF properties of the cellular modules and it is important to prevent them from flowing into the module The RF shields do not provide 100 protection for the module from coating liquids with low viscosity therefore care is required in applying the coating L Conformal Coating of the module will void the warranty 3 3 10 Casting If casting is required use viscose or another type of silicon pottant The OEM is strongly advised to qualify such process
279. te when the module is in command mode or in online command mode and is set to the ON state when the module is in data mode If AT amp SO is set the DSR module output line is set by default to the ON state low level at UART initialization and is then always held in the ON state DTR signal behavior The DTR module input line is set by default to the OFF state high level at UART initialization The module then holds the DTR line in the OFF state if the line is not activated by the DTE an active pull up is enabled inside the module on the DTR input Module behavior according to DTR status can be changed by AT command configuration for more details see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 amp D AT command description If AT UPSV 3 is set the DTR line is monitored by the module to manage the power saving configuration for more details see section 1 9 2 4 and u blox AT Commands Manual 3 AT UPSV When an OFF to ON transition occurs on the DTR input the UART is enabled and the module is forced to active mode after 5 ms from the transition the switch is completed and data can be received without loss The module cannot enter low power idle mode and the UART is keep enabled as long as the DTR input line is held in the ON state If the DTR input line is set to the OFF state by the DTE the UART is disabled held in low power mode and the module automatically enters low power idle mode whenever possible DCD signal behavior If
280. the DTE should always send a dummy character to the module before the AT prefix set at the beginning of each command line the first dummy character is ignored if the module is in active mode or it represents the wake up character if the module is in low power idle mode L In command mode if autobauding is disabled and HW flow control is not implemented the DTE should always send a dummy AT to the module before each command line the first dummy AT is not ignored if the module is in active mode i e the module replies OK or it represents the wake up character if the module is in low power idle mode i e the module does not reply Additional considerations If the USB is connected and not suspended the module is forced to stay in active mode therefore the AT UPSV settings are overruled but they have effect on the UART behavior they configure UART power saving so that UART is enabled disabled according to the AT UPSV settings 1 9 2 5 UART multiplexer protocol TOBY L2 series modules include multiplexer functionality as per 3GPP TS 27 010 11 on the UART physical link This is a data link protocol which uses HDLC like framing and operates between the module DCE and the application processor DTE and allows a number of simultaneous sessions over the used physical link UART the user can concurrently use AT interface on one MUX channel and data communication on another MUX channel The following virtual
281. the card thickness which nominal value is 3 7 mm as described in Figure 72 Hole GND ANT2 ANT1 GND Hole 3 7 mm 30 mm o Hole GND GND Hole l H a E a i H 7 Uu E GU lee o dei L ID N L mn Tut Pin 1 Top View Pin 51 Side View Pin 52 Bottom View Pin 2 Figure 72 MPCI L2 series mechanical description top side and bottom views MPCI L2 series modules are fully compliant with the 52 pin PCI Express Full Mini card edge type system connector as defined by the PCI Express Mini Card Electromechanical Specification 16 Table 47 describes some examples of 52 pin mating system connectors for the MPCI L2 series PCI Express Full Mini card modules Manufacturer Part Number Description JAE Electronics MM6DO series 52 circuit 0 8 mm pitch PCI Express Mini card edge female connector Molex 67910 series 52 circuit 0 8 mm pitch PCI Express Mini card edge female connector TE Connectivity AMP 2041119 series 52 circuit 0 8 mm pitch PCI Express Mini card edge female connector FCI 10123824 series 52 circuit 0 8 mm pitch PCI Express Mini card edge female connector Table 47 MPCI L2 series PCI Express Full Mini card compatible connector L It is recommended to use the two mounting holes described in Figure 72 to fix ground
282. the following web address http www ic gc ca eic site smt gst nsf eng sf08792 html IMPORTANT Manufacturers of portable applications incorporating the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules are required to have their final product certified and apply for their own Industry Canada Certificate related to the specific portable device This is mandatory to meet the SAR requirements for portable devices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canada avis d Industrie Canada IC Cet appareil num rique de classe B est conforme aux normes canadiennes CAN ICES 3B NMB 3 B et CNR 210 Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes o cet appareil ne doit pas causer d interf rence o cet appareil doit accepter toute interf rence notamment les interf rences qui peuvent affecter son fonctionnement Informations concernant l exposition aux fr quences radio RF La puissance de sortie mise par l appareil de sans fil u blox Cellular Module est inf rieure la limite d exposition aux fr quences radio d Industrie Canada IC Utilisez l appareil de sans fil u blox Cellular Module de facon minimiser les contacts humains lors du fonctionnement normal Ce p riph rique a t valu et d montr conforme aux limites d exposition aux fr quences radio RF d IC lorsqu il est install dans des produits h tes particuliers
283. the low power idle mode whenever possible but it must periodically monitor the paging channel of the current base station paging block reception in accordance to the 2G 3G LTE system requirements even if connected mode is not enabled by the application When the module monitors the paging channel it wakes up to the active mode to enable the reception of paging block In between the module switches to low power idle mode This is known as discontinuous reception DRX The module processor core is activated during the paging block reception and automatically switches its reference clock frequency from 32 kHz to the 26 MHz used in active mode The time period between two paging block receptions is defined by the network This is the paging period parameter fixed by the base station through broadcast channel sent to all users on the same serving cell In case of 2G radio access technology the paging period can vary from 470 8 ms DRX 2 length of 2 x 51 2G frames 2 x 51 x 4 615 ms up to 2118 4 ms DRX 9 length of 9 x 51 2G frames 9 x 51 x 4 615 ms e n case of 3G radio access technology the paging period can vary from 640 ms DRX 6 i e length of 2 3G frames 64 x 10 ms up to 5120 ms DRX 9 length of 2 3G frames 512 x 10 ms In case of LTE radio access technology the paging period can vary from 320 ms DRX 5 i e length of 2 LTE frames 32 x 10 ms up to 2560 ms DRX 8 length of 2 LTE frames 256 x 10 ms
284. the soldering process has taken place The paste listed in the example below meets these criteria Soldering Paste OM338 SAC405 Nr 143714 Cookson Electronics Alloy specification 95 5 Sn 3 996 Ag 0 6 Cu 95 5 Tin 3 9 Silver 0 6 Copper 95 5 Sn 4 0 Ag 0 5 Cu 95 5 Tin 4 0 Silver 0 5 Copper Melting Temperature 217 C Stencil Thickness 150 um for base boards The final choice of the soldering paste depends on the approved manufacturing procedures The paste mask geometry for applying soldering paste should meet the recommendations in section 2 12 L The quality of the solder joints on the connectors half vias should meet the appropriate IPC specification 3 3 2 Reflow soldering A convection type soldering oven is strongly recommended for TOBY L2 series modules over the infrared type radiation oven Convection heated ovens allow precise control of the temperature and all parts will be heated up evenly regardless of material properties thickness of components and surface color Consider the IPC 7530 Guidelines for temperature profiling for mass soldering reflow and wave processes published 2001 Reflow profiles are to be selected according to the following recommendations A Failure to observe these recommendations can result in severe damage to the device Preheat phase Initial heating of component leads and balls Residual humidity will be dried out Note that this preheat phase will not rep
285. triction to the design of the PCB where the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series module is mounted o The radiation performance mainly depends on the antennas It is required to select antennas with optimal radiating performance in the operating bands o RF cables should be carefully selected to have minimum insertion losses Additional insertion loss will be introduced by low quality or long cable Large insertion loss reduces both transmit and receive radiation performance o A high quality 50 Q RF connector provides proper PCB to RF cable transition It is recommended to strictly follow the layout and cable termination guidelines provided by the connector manufacturer Integrated antennas e g patch like antennas o Internal integrated antennas imply physical restriction to the design of the PCB Integrated antenna excites RF currents on its counterpoise typically the PCB ground plane of the device that becomes part of the antenna its dimension defines the minimum frequency that can be radiated Therefore the ground plane can be reduced down to a minimum size that should be similar to the quarter of the wavelength of the minimum frequency that has to be radiated given that the orientation of the ground plane relative to the antenna element must be considered The isolation between the primary and the secondary antennas has to be as high as possible and the correlation between the 3D radiation patterns of the two antennas has to be as low as possible
286. ts the switch off routine e The module replies OK on the AT interface the switch off routine is in progress e At the end of the switch off routine all the digital pins are tri stated and all the internal voltage regulators are turned off including the generic digital interfaces supply V INT except the RTC supply V BCKP e Then the module remains in power off mode as long as a switch on event does not occur e g applying a proper low level to the PWR ON input or applying a proper low level to the RESET N input and enters not powered mode if the supply is removed from the VCC pins AT CPWROFF OK VCC sentto the module replied by the module can be removed V BCKP E gg g g NLLLL PWR ON Fhe RESET_N E Y NM V INT E El H Internal Reset TO a MM System State Operational Operational gt Tristate Figure 15 TOBY L2 series power off sequence description BB Pads State L The Internal Reset signal is not available on a module pin but the application can monitor the V_INT pin to sense the end of the power off sequence Figure 16 describes the MPCI L2 power off procedure with the following phases e When the AT CFUN 127 command is issued the module starts the halt mode setting routine e The module replies OK on the AT interface after this the module is set in the halt mode e Then the module remains in the Halt mode and enters not powered mode if the supply is removed from the 3 3Vaux pins AT
287. turns to the active mode Table 6 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules operating modes description Figure 3 describes the transition between the different operating modes Not powered TOBY L2 Remove VCC TOBY L2 Switch ON Power off Apply VCC MPCI L2 Switch ON Apply 3 3Vaux MPCI L2 e AT CFUN 127 and then remove 3 3Vaux TOBY L2 TOBY L2 Switch ON Switch OFF e PWR ON AT CPWROFF RESET N RESET N RTC alarm Incoming outgoing call or other dedicated device network communication If power saving is enabled and there is no activity for a defined time interval No RF TX RX in progress Any wake up event described Call terminated in the module operating Communication dropped modes summary table above Figure 3 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules operating modes transition UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 21 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 5 Supply interfaces 1 5 1 Module supply input VCC or 3 3Vaux TOBY L2 modules are supplied via the three VCC pins and MPCI L2 modules are supplied via the five 3 3Vaux pins All supply voltages used inside the modules are generated from the VCC or the 3 3Vaux supply input by integrated voltage regulators including the V_BCKP RTC supply the V_INT generic digital interface supply and the VSIM or UIM PWR SIM interface supply The current drawn
288. ual Figure 14 shows the module power on sequence from the not powered mode describing the following phases RESET_N or PERST The external supply is applied to the VCC or 3 3Vaux module supply inputs representing the start up event The PWR_ON and the RESET_N or PERST pins suddenly rise to high logic level due to internal pull ups The V_BCKP RTC supply output is suddenly enabled by the module as VCC reaches a valid voltage value All the generic digital pins of the module are tri stated until the switch on of their supply source V INT The internal reset signal is held low the baseband core and all the digital pins are held in the reset state The reset state of all the digital pins is reported in the pin description table of TOBY L2 Series Data Sheet 1 When the internal reset signal is released any digital pin is set in a proper sequence from the reset state to the default operational configured state The duration of this pins configuration phase differs within generic digital interfaces and the USB interface due to host device enumeration timings see section 1 9 1 The module is fully ready to operate after all interfaces are configured Start up Start of interface Module interfaces event configuration are configured VCC or 3 3Vaux V_BCKP PWR_ON V_INT Internal Reset System State BB Pads State Internal Reset Internal Reset gt Operational Oms 5ms 10 ms 205 Figure 14 TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 ser
289. ual 3 UUSBCONF AT command UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 42 of 162 Q Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 9 1 2 USB in Windows USB drivers are provided for Windows operating system platforms and should be properly installed enabled by following the step by step instructions available in the EVK L2x User Guide 4 or in the Windows Embedded OS USB Driver Installation Application Note 5 USB drivers are available for the following operating system platforms Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows 10 Windows Embedded CE 6 0 Windows Embedded Compact 7 Windows Embedded Compact 2013 The module firmware can be upgraded over the USB interface by means of the FOAT feature or using the u blox EasyFlash tool for more details see Firmware Update Application Note 6 1 9 1 3 USB in Linux Android It is not required to install a specific driver for each Linux based or Android based operating system OS to use the module USB interface which is compatible with standard Linux Android USB kernel drivers The full capability and configuration of the module USB interface can be reported by running Isusb v or an equivalent command available in the host operating system when the module is connected 1 9 1 4 USB and power saving The modules automatically enter the USB suspended state when the device has observed no bus traffic for a specific time perio
290. ues during LTE 3G 2G RF voltage ripple during transmissions in connected mode directly affect the RF RF transmission compliance with applicable certification schemes Figure 5 describes supply voltage ripple during RF Tx VCC or 3 3Vaux Absent or at least minimized Supply voltage under shoot or over shoot at the start or under over shoot at the end of 2G TDMA transmission slots directly affect the start end of Tx slots RF compliance with applicable certification schemes Figure 5 describes supply voltage under over shoot Table 7 Summary of VCC or 3 3Vaux modules supply requirements UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 22 of 162 ir OX TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 5 1 2 VCC or 3 3Vaux current consumption in 2G connected mode When a GSM call is established the VCC or 3 3Vaux module current consumption is determined by the current consumption profile typical of the GSM transmitting and receiving bursts The peak of current consumption during a transmission slot is strictly dependent on the RF transmitted power which is regulated by the network the current base station The transmitted power in the transmit slot is also the more relevant factor for determining the average current consumption If the module is transmitting in 2G single slot mode in the 850 or 900 MHz bands at the maximum RF power level approximately 2 W or 33 dBm in the allocated transmit slot burst the c
291. uggested schematic design for the VCC and 3 3Vaux supply application circuit using an LDO linear regulator Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer C1 C2 10 pF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0603 20 6 3 V GRM188R60J106ME47 Murata c3 330 pF Capacitor Tantalum D SIZE 6 3 V 45 mQ T520D337MO006ATE045 KEMET R1 47 kQ Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W RC0402JR 0747KL Yageo Phycomp R2 9 1 kO Resistor 0402 596 0 1 W RC0402JR 079K1L Yageo Phycomp R3 3 9 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RCO0402JR 073K9L Yageo Phycomp R4 3 3 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RC0402JR 073K3L Yageo Phycomp R5 1 8 kQ Resistor 0402 5 0 1 W RC0402JR 071K8L Yageo Phycomp U1 LDO Linear Regulator ADJ 3 0 A LT1764AEQ PBF Linear Technology Table 17 Suggested components for VCC and 3 3Vaux supply application circuit using an LDO linear regulator UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 75 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Figure 35 and the components listed in Table 18 show an example of a low cost power supply circuit where the VCC module supply is provided by an LDO linear regulator capable of delivering the specified highest peak pulse current with proper power handling capability The regulator described in this example supports a limited input voltage range and it includes internal circuitry for current and thermal protection It is recommended to configure the LDO linear regulator to generate a voltage supply value sl
292. uivalents Table 25 lists some RF connector plugs that fit MPCI L2 series modules RF connector receptacles based on the declaration of the respective manufacturers Only the Hirose has been qualified for the MPCI L2 series modules contact other producers to verify compatibility Manufacturer Series Remarks Hirose U FL Ultra Small Surface Mount Coaxial Connector Recommended PEX MHF Micro Coaxial Connector Tyco UMCC Ultra Miniature Coax Connector Amphenol RF AMC Amphenol Micro Coaxial Lighthorse Technologies Inc IPX ultra micro miniature RF connector Table 25 MPCI L2 series U FL compatible plug connector Typically the RF plug is available as a cable assembly several kinds are available and the user should select the cable assembly best suited to the application The key characteristics are RF plug type select U FL or equivalent Nominal impedance 50 Q Cable thickness typically from 0 8 mm to 1 37 mm Select thicker cables to minimize insertion loss Cable length standard length is typically 100 mm or 200 mm custom lengths may be available on request Select shorter cables to minimize insertion loss RF connector on the other side of the cable for example another U FL for board to board connection or SMA for panel mounting For applications requiring an internal integrated SMT antenna it is suggested to use a U FL to U FL cable to provide RF path from the MPCI L2 series module to PCB strip line or micro strip connecte
293. ular e Antenna 82nH 10k CL 27pF ESD V_INT See SIM Card Holder sw1 Sw2 CCVCC C1 CCVPP C6 CCIO C7 CCCLK C3 CCRST C2 GND C5 470k 47pF 47pF 47pF A7pF 100nF gsp Esp ESD ESD ESD ESD V_INT Audio Codec MAX9860 V_INT 10K VDD i e TC IRQn 100nF ur _ 10pF MICBIAS 4 7k Pir 2 2k d SDA 4 7k Tr ae sc 1uE EMI MIC MICLP H L re 4 EMI ER c on mcn HHE e oo H 22k II sour Xx MICGND 10nF 10nF 27pF 27pF ESD ESD ER eck EE E e gt SPK EMI Ewe 5c ovr he e e OUTN E 1 e e 61 em MCLK if X X 10nF 10nF 27pF 27pF ESD ESD ELLA W131 VINT 3V8 LDOregulator 3V3 Wi Fi module IN OUT c cEM 3V3 SHDNn GND e LDOregulator 1V8 IN OUT VIO 1V8 SE 7 Wi Fi SHDNn GND antenna e ANT1 Be E SD DO SD Di SD D2 SD D3 SD CLK SD CMD ANT2 PDn RESETn SLEEP CLK CFG GND Figure 77 Example of schematic diagram to integrate a TOBY L2 module 02 version in an application using all interfaces UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 135 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 16 4 Schematic for MPCI L2 series Figure 78 is an example of a schematic diagram where a MPCI L2 series module is integrated into an application board using all the available interfaces and functions of the module MPCI L2 series 3V3 3 3Vaux D 3 3Vaux 3 3Vaux
294. ulated on the application board providing a proper switch to connect only the first or only the second SIM at a time to the SIM interface of the modules as described in Figure 52 TOBY L2 modules 00 01 and 60 product versions and MPCI L2 modules do not support SIM hot insertion removal functionality the physical connection between the external SIM and the module has to be provided before the module boot and then held for normal operation Switching from one SIM to another can only be properly done within one of these two time periods after TOBY L2 module switch off by the AT CPWROFF and before TOBY L2 module switch on by PWR ON after TOBY L2 MPCI L2 module deregistration from network by AT COPS 2 or by AT CFUN 4 and before TOBY L2 MPCI L2 module reset reboot by AT CFUN 16 or AT CFUN 1 1 TOBY L2 modules except 00 01 and 60 product versions support SIM hot insertion removal on the GPIO5 pin if the feature is enabled using the specific AT commands see sections 1 8 2 and 1 11 and u blox AT Commands Manual 3 UGPIOC UDCONF 50 commands the switch from first SIM to the second SIM can be properly done when a Low logic level is present on the GPIO5 pin SIM not inserted SIM interface not enabled without the necessity of a module re boot so that the SIM interface will be re enabled by the module to use the second SIM when a high logic level is re applied on the GPIO5 pin In the application circuit example represented
295. upling between microphone and speaker receiver lines Optimize the mechanical design of the application device the position orientation and mechanical fixing for example using rubber gaskets of microphone and speaker parts in order to avoid echo interference between uplink path and downlink path UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 120 of 162 Q Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Keep ground separation from microphone lines to other noisy signals Use an intermediate ground layer or vias wall for coplanar signals In case of external audio device providing differential microphone input route microphone signal lines as a differential pair embedded in ground to reduce differential noise pick up The balanced configuration will help reject the common mode noise Cross other signals lines on adjacent layers with 90 crossing Place bypass capacitor for RF very close to active microphone The preferred microphone should be designed for GSM applications which typically have internal built in bypass capacitor for RF very close to active device If the integrated FET detects the RF burst the resulting DC level will be in the pass band of the audio circuitry and cannot be filtered by any other device General guidelines for the downlink path speaker receiver are the following The physical width of the audio output lines on the application board must be wide enough to minimize s
296. urrent consumption can reach an high peak see the Current consumption section in the TOBY L2 Data Sheet 1 or the MPCI L2 Data Sheet 2 for 576 9 us width of the transmit slot burst with a periodicity of 4 615 ms width of 1 frame 8 slots burst so with a 1 8 duty cycle according to GSM TDMA Time Division Multiple Access If the module is transmitting in 2G single slot mode in the 1800 or 1900 MHz bands the current consumption figures are quite less high than the one in the low bands due to 3GPP transmitter output power specifications During a GSM call current consumption is not so significantly high in receiving or in monitor bursts and is low in the inactive unused bursts Figure 4 shows an example of the module current consumption profile versus time in 2G single slot mode Current A Peak current depends on TX power and actual antenna load Time ms 1 frame 8 slots 1 frame 8 slots Figure 4 VCC or 3 3Vaux current consumption profile versus time during a 2G single slot call 1 TX slot 1 RX slot Figure 5 illustrates VCC or 3 3Vaux voltage profile versus time during a 2G single slot call according to the relative VCC or 3 3Vaux current consumption profile described in Figure 4 Voltage mV overshoot 3 8V Wu ww typ Lu rop l ripple undershoot RX Junused unused TX unused unused MON unused RX unused unused TX unused unused MON unused slot slot slot slot slot
297. ust be implemented on the application board See section 1 7 2 for detailed antenna detection interface functional description and see section 2 4 2 for detection circuit on application board and diagnostic circuit on antenna assembly design in guidelines 1 15 3 Jamming detection L Congestion detection i e jamming detection is not supported by 00 01 02 60 versions In real network situations modules can experience various kind of out of coverage conditions limited service conditions when roaming to networks not supporting the specific SIM limited service in cells which are not suitable or barred due to operators choices no cell condition when moving to poorly served or highly interfered areas In the latter case interference can be artificially injected in the environment by a noise generator covering a given spectrum thus obscuring the operator s carriers entitled to give access to the LTE 3G 2G service The congestion i e jamming detection feature can be enabled and configured by the UCD AT command the feature consists of detecting an anomalous source of interference and signaling the start and stop of such conditions to the host application processor with an unsolicited indication which can react appropriately by e g switching off the radio transceiver of the module i e configuring the module in airplane mode by means of the CFUN AT command in order to reduce power consumption and monitoring the environment at con
298. ved reference design of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 131 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual The antenna interface application circuit implemented in the EMC ESD approved reference designs of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules is described in Figure 47 in case of antennas detection circuit not implemented and is described in Figure 48 and Table 29 in case of antennas detection circuit implemented section 2 4 RESET_N and PERST pin The following precautions are suggested for the RESET_N and the PERST line of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules depending on the application board handling to satisfy ESD immunity test requirements It is recommended to keep the connection line to RESET_N and PERST as short as possible Maximum ESD sensitivity rating of the RESET_N and the PERST pin is 1 kV Human Body Model according to JESD22 A114 Higher protection level could be required if the RESET_N or PERST pin is externally accessible on the application board The following precautions are suggested to achieve higher protection level A general purpose ESD protection device e g EPCOS CAO5P4S14THSG varistor array or EPCOS CT0402S14AHSG varistor should be mounted on the RESET_N or PERST line close to accessible point The RESET N and PERST application circuit implemented in the EMC ESD approved reference designs of TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 ser
299. vice integrating a TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series module with applicable certification schemes Very carefully follow the suggestions provided in the relative section 2 4 for schematic and layout design 2 Module supply VCC or 3 3Vaux and GND pins The supply circuit affects the RF compliance of the device integrating a TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series module with applicable required certification schemes as well as antenna circuit design Very carefully follow the suggestions provided in the relative section 2 2 1 for schematic and layout design 3 USB interface USB Dr USB D pins Accurate design is required to guarantee USB 2 0 high speed interface functionality Carefully follow the suggestions provided in the relative section 2 6 1 for schematic and layout design 4 SIM interface VSIM SIM CLK SIM IO SIM RST or UIM PWR UIM DATA UIM CLK UIM RESET pins Accurate design is required to guarantee SIM card functionality reducing the risk of RF coupling Carefully follow the suggestions provided in the relative section 2 5 for schematic and layout design 5 SDIO interface SDIO DO SDIO D1 SDIO D2 SDIO D3 SDIO CLK SDIO CMD pins Accurate design is required to guarantee SDIO interface functionality Carefully follow the suggestions provided in the relative section 2 6 4 for schematic and layout design 6 System functions RESET N or PERST PWR ON pins Accurate design is required to guarantee that the voltage level is well defined dur
300. w when the module is in power down mode and during the module power on sequence at least until the activation of the V INT supply output of the module to avoid latch up of circuits and allow a proper boot of the module see the remark below Moreover the voltage scaling from any 1 8 V output of the cellular module DCE to the corresponding 3 0 V input of the Application Processor DTE can be implemented by means of an appropriate low cost non inverting buffer with open drain output The non inverting buffer should be supplied by the V INT supply output of the cellular module Consider the value of the pull up integrated at each input of the DTE if any and the baud rate required by the application for the appropriate selection of the resistance value for the external pull up biased by the application processor supply rail L If power saving is enabled the application circuit with the TXD and RXD lines only is not recommended During command mode the DTE must send to the module a wake up character or a dummy AT before each command line see section 1 9 2 4 for the complete description but during data mode the wake up character or the dummy AT would affect the data communication L Do not apply voltage to any UART interface pin before the switch on of the UART supply source V_INT to avoid latch up of circuits and allow a proper boot of the module If the external signals connected to the cellular module cannot be tri stated or s
301. ware flow control setting can be changed by AT commands for more details see the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 AT amp K ATQ AT IFC AT commands If the hardware flow control is not enabled the CTS line still indicates when the UART interface is enabled as it does when hardware flow control is enabled The module drives the CTS line to the ON state or to the OFF state when it is either able or not able to accept data from the DTE over the UART interface L When the power saving configuration is enabled by AT UPSV command and the hardware flow control is not implemented in the DTE DCE connection data sent by the DTE can be lost the first character sent when the module is in low power idle mode will not be a valid communication character see section 1 9 2 4 and in particular the sub section Wake up via data reception for further details RTS signal behavior The hardware flow control input RTS line is set by default to the OFF state high level at UART initialization The module then holds the RTS line in the OFF state if the line is not activated by the DTE an active pull up is enabled inside the module on the RTS input If the HW flow control is enabled as it is by default the module monitors the RTS line to detect permission from the DTE to send data to the DTE itself If the RTS line is set to the OFF state any on going data transmission from the module is interrupted until the RTS line changes to the ON state L The DTE
302. when the module is switched off TOBY L2 series Power Baseband Management Processor Weg gt Digital I Switching Digital VO vcc Ei es Ber Down vcc EA V INT KE Figure 12 TOBY L2 series generic digital interfaces supply output V INT simplified block diagram The switching regulator operates in Pulse Width Modulation PWM mode for greater efficiency at high output loads and it automatically switches to Pulse Frequency Modulation PFM power save mode for greater efficiency at low output loads The V INT output voltage ripple is specified in the TOBY L2 series Data Sheet 1 UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 30 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 6 System function interfaces 1 6 1 Module power on L The PWR_ON input pin is not available on MPCI L2 series modules When the TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series modules are in the not powered mode switched off i e the VCC or 3 3Vaux module supply is not applied they can be switched on as following Rising edge on the VCC or 3 3Vaux supply input to a valid voltage for module supply so that the module switches on applying a proper VCC or 3 3Vaux supply within the normal operating range Alternately the RESET_N or PERST pin can be held to the low level during the VCC or 3 3Vaux rising edge so that the module switches on releasing the RESET_N or
303. wnlink path by the user himself to have perception the call is on For the appropriate selection of a compliant external digital audio device see section 1 10 1 and see the UI2S AT command description in the u blox AT Commands Manual 3 for further details regarding the capabilities and the possible settings of I S digital audio interface of TOBY L2 modules An appropriate specific application circuit has to be implemented and configured according to the particular external digital audio device or audio codec used and according to the application requirements Examples of manufacturers offering compatible audio codec parts are the following Maxim Integrated as the MAX9860 MAX9867 MAX9880A audio codecs Texas Instruments National Semiconductor Cirrus Logic Wolfson Microelectronics Nuvoton Technology Asahi Kasei Microdevices Realtek Semiconductor UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 118 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual Figure 66 and Table 42 describe an application circuit for the Te digital audio interface providing basic voice capability using an external audio voice codec in particular the Maxim MAX9860 audio codec DAC and ADC integrated in the external audio codec respectively converts an incoming digital data stream to analog audio output through a mono amplifier and converts the microphone input signal to the digital bit stream over the digital audio interface
304. x 2 and 3G Receiver Diversity radio technologies supported by the modules as LTE category 4 and HSDPA category 24 User Equipments incoming signals are received through the primary ANT1 and the secondary ANT2 antenna input ports which are connected to the RF transceiver via specific antenna switch diplexer duplexer LNA SAW band pass filters RF transceiver performs modulation up conversion of the baseband MO signals for Tx down conversion and demodulation of the dual RF signals for Rx The RF transceiver contains Automatically gain controlled direct conversion Zero IF receiver Highly linear RF demodulator modulator capable GMSK 8 PSK QPSK 16 QAM 64 QAM Fractional N Sigma Delta RF synthesizer VCO Power Amplifiers PA amplify the Tx signal modulated by the RF transceiver RF switches connect primary ANT1 and secondary ANT2 antenna ports to the suitable Tx Rx path Low Noise Amplifiers LNA enhance the received sensitivity SAW duplexers separate the Tx and Rx signal paths and provide FF filtering SAW band pass filters enhance the rejection of out of band signals 26 MHz crystal oscillator generates the clock reference in active mode or connected mode Baseband and power management section The Baseband and Power Management section is composed of the following main elements A mixed signal ASIC which integrates Microprocessor for control functions DSP core for LTE 3G 2G Layer 1 and digital processing of Rx and Tx signal paths M
305. y cycle according to 2G TDMA If the module is in GPRS connected mode in the 1800 or 1900 MHz bands the current consumption figures are quite less high than the one in the low bands due to 3GPP transmitter output power specifications Figure 6 reports the current consumption profiles in GPRS class 12 connected mode in the 850 or 900 MHz bands with 4 slots used to transmit and 1 slot used to receive Current A Peak current depends on TX power and actual antenna load TX TX slot Time ms rame 4 615 ms 1 frame 8 slots 1 frame 8 slots Figure 6 VCC or 3 3Vaux current consumption profile during a 2G GPRS EDGE multi slot connection 4 TX slots 1 RX slot In case of EDGE connections the VCC current consumption profile is very similar to the GPRS current profile so the image shown in Figure 6 representing the current consumption profile in GPRS class 12 connected mode is valid for the EDGE class 12 connected mode as well UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information System description Page 24 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 1 5 1 3 VCC or 3 3Vaux current consumption in 3G connected mode During a 3G connection the module can transmit and receive continuously due to the Frequency Division Duplex FDD mode of operation with the Wideband Code Division Multiple Access WCDMA The current consumption depends on output RF pow
306. y the customer application the ANT DET pin can be left not connected and the ANT1 ANT2 pins can be directly connected to the related antenna connector by means of a 50 O transmission line as described in Figure 47 2 4 3 2 Guidelines for ANT DET layout design The recommended layout for the primary antenna detection circuit to be provided on the application board to achieve the primary antenna detection functionality implementing the recommended schematic described in Figure 48 and Table 29 is explained here The ANT1 ANT2 pins have to be connected to the antenna connector by means of a 50 O transmission line implementing the design guidelines described in section 2 4 1 and the recommendations of the SMA connector manufacturer DC blocking capacitor at ANT1 ANT2 pins C2 C3 has to be placed in series to the 50 Q RF line The ANT DET pin has to be connected to the 50 O transmission line by means of a sense line Choke inductors in series at the ANT DET pin L1 L2 have to be placed so that one pad is on the 50 O transmission line and the other pad represents the start of the sense line to the ANT DET pin The additional components R1 C1 and D1 on the ANT DET line have to be placed as ESD protection UBX 13004618 R12 Early Production Information Design in Page 98 of 162 ir Ox TOBY L2 and MPCI L2 series System Integration Manual 2 5 SIM interface Le SIM detection interface GPIO5 is not available on the MPCI L2 seri
307. y voltage reaches the regulated output voltage 4 2 V the L6924U starts to reduce the current until the charge termination is done The charging process ends when the charging current reaches the value configured by an external resistor to 15 mA or when the charging timer reaches the value configured by an external capacitor to 9800 s Using a battery pack with an internal NTC resistor the L6924U can monitor the battery temperature to protect the battery from operating under unsafe thermal conditions Alternatively the L6924U providing input voltage range up to 12 V can charge from an AC wall adapter When a current limited adapter is used it can operate in quasi pulse mode reducing power dissipation Li lon Li Polymer Battery Charger IC TOBY L2 series 5vo USB oe Supply VIN Vout VCC 4 Vinss Vosns bd e oo o o o VCC Li lon Li Pol MODE VREF Battery Pack vec SEL R1 C3 Ura caf m USB ab L AC TH e e H R3 9 END ER C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 PRG m SD GND X X B1 GND C1 C2 U1 A D1 Figure 37 Li lon or Li Polymer battery charging application circuit Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer B1 Li l

TOBY-L2 series - U-Blox

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents